2008 Pontiac Wave Owner Manual M

2008 Pontiac Wave Owner Manual M
2008 Pontiac Wave Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-14
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-32
Airbag System
......................................... 1-55
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-70
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors .................................................... 2-34
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-36
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-38
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-26
Secondary Information Center (SIC) ............ 3-43
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-53
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-22
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-43
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-44
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-53
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-80
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-90
Electrical System ...................................... 5-90
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-101
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
.... 5-102
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-16
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,
and the PONTIAC Emblem are registered trademarks;
and the name WAVE is a trademark of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Pontiac Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25810504 A First Printing
ii
©
2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let this
happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Seat Height Adjuster .......................................1-3
Manual Lumbar (Sedan) ..................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Rear Seat Operation (Sedan) ...........................1-7
Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback) ....................1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-14
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-19
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-27
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-31
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-31
Child Restraints .............................................1-32
Older Children ..............................................1-32
Infants and Young Children ............................1-34
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-38
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-51
Airbag System ...............................................1-55
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-58
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-60
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-61
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-62
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-62
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-64
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-68
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-69
Restraint System Check ..................................1-70
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-70
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-71
1-1
Front Seats
Pull up and hold the bar
located under the front of
the seat to unlock it.
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Then try to move the seat with your body, to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
Seat Height Adjuster
To adjust the height of the
driver’s seat cushion, turn
the knob located on
the outboard side of the
seat cushion.
Turn the knob forward to raise the height of the seat
cushion and rearward to lower it.
Manual Lumbar (Sedan)
Your vehicle may have
manually operated
lumbar support for the
driver’s seat.
To adjust the front seat lumbar support, use the lever
located on the outboard side of the seatback.
Push the lever down to adjust the support for the lower
part of the seatback. Pull the lever up to return the
support to its original position.
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
of the seats.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-4
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-5
Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chances of a neck injury in
a crash.
1-6
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower it, press
the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push
the head restraint down.
The front seat head restraints also tilt forward. To tilt the
head restraint, first put it in the upright position by tilting it
forward fully and releasing it. Then slowly move the head
restraint forward until it is in the desired position.
The front head restraints can also be removed.
To remove the restraint, press the button located on the
top of the seatback, and lift the head restraint from the
guide sleeve. Replace the head restraint before driving.
The rear seats have head restraints that are adjustable
up and down, but they do not tilt.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation (Sedan)
Folding the Seatback
The rear seatbacks can be folded down to increase
cargo space.
To fold down the seatback:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1. Remove the safety belt strap from the safety belt
guide by pulling it through the slot.
2. Push the head restraints all the way down.
3. Unlatch the center safety belt by pressing the red
button on the buckle.
1-7
4. Detach the center safety belt from the mini buckle
by inserting the key into the slot in the mini buckle,
pressing the release button, and allowing it to retract.
1-8
5. Pull up the release knob located on top of the rear
seatback.
6. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.
To return the seatback to the upright position:
1. Hook the safety belts into the safety belt guide.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it to its original
position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
3. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of the
seatback until it latches securely in the fully
upright position.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
6. Insert the safety belt strap back into the safety belt
guide.
7. Reattach the center safety belt by pushing the latch
plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. To reattach the center seat safety belt to the mini
buckle, pull it from the retractor.
5. Push the latch plate at the end of the safety belt
strap into the buckle until the mechanism clicks.
Make sure the strap is not twisted. The sliding latch
plate will face the front of the vehicle.
1-9
Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback)
Folding the Rear Seats
The rear seats can be folded to increase cargo space.
To fold the rear seats:
1. Lower the head restraints completely.
2. Unlatch the center safety belt by pressing the red
button on the buckle.
4. Pull up the release knob, located on the top of the
seatback, and fold the seatback forward and down.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
3. Detach the center safety belt from the mini buckle by
inserting the key into the slot in the mini buckle,
pressing the release button, and allowing it to retract.
1-10
5. Move the safety belt buckles and safety belt in the
center seating position out of the space between
the seatback and the seat cushion so they are not in
the way as the seat is being folded.
6. Pull the release handles on the rear side of the seat
cushion to unlock the seat cushion.
8. Clip the hook to the front seat head restraint to
keep the rear seat secure.
7. Lift the seat cushion up and flip it forward.
9. When the rear seat is folded, store the safety belt
buckles and center safety belt in the storage area
under the floor mat.
1-11
Unfolding the Seats
To return the rear seats to the normal seating position:
1. Unclip the hook from the front seat head restraint.
2. Remove the safety belt buckles and center
seat safety belt from the storage area.
Notice: Damage to the safety belt buckle or rear
seat locking mechanism can occur if the safety belt
and buckles are pinched under the rear seat
cushion. Do not place the safety belt and buckles
on the floor under the rear seat cushion when
the rear seat is put back to the sitting position.
3. Push the seat cushion down to its original position
until it latches securely. Try to pull up on the seat to
make sure it is locked in place.
1-12
4. Hook the safety belts in the outboard seating
positions into the retaining clips.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
5. Lift the seatback up and push it back to its original
latched position.
6. Unhook the safety belts in the outboard seating
positions from the retaining clips.
7. Return the safety belt buckles and the center seat
safety belt to their original position between the rear
seatback and the seat cushion. Make sure the
straps of the safety belt and buckles are not twisted.
8. To reattach the center seat safety belt to the mini
buckle, pull it from the retractor.
9. Reattach the center safety belt by pushing the latch
plate into the buckle until it clicks.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
10. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of the
seatback until it latches securely in the fully
upright position.
1-13
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
1-14
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-30.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-15
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-16
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-17
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-18
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-34. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the
lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much
protection this way.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-24
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-25
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-26
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable
safety belt and the safety belt is not attached, see
Rear Seat Operation (Sedan) on page 1-7 or Rear Seat
Operation (Hatchback) on page 1-10 for instruction
on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
3. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
1-27
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
1-28
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-29
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-30
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-71.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety Belt Extender
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-31
Child Restraints
Older Children
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, then
return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-32
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries
in a crash.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-33
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child might slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-34
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
child restraint.
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
{CAUTION:
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
Infants should always be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children should always be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-37
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-38
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-39
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64
for additional information.
1-40
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
There are a couple of things you need to know
about using child restraints in your rear seat:
If you use a child restraint
in the center rear seating
position (A), the safety
belts and the child restraint
LATCH anchors for the
rear outside seating
positions (B) will not be
accessible.
Therefore, you will not be able to secure child restraints
or have passengers ride in the rear outside seating
positions.
If you use two child
restraints (A) in the rear
outside seating positions,
the safety belt for the
center rear seat
position (B) will not be
accessible.
Therefore, you will not be able to secure a child
restraint or have a passenger ride in the center rear
seating position.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-41
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Lower Anchors
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and
its attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-42
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child
restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-43
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
Hatchback models may have zippers over the lower
anchor areas. If so, unzip the seat cover below
the labels to access each lower anchor.
1-44
Sedan
For sedan models, the top tether anchors are located
under the covers behind the rear seat on the filler panel.
Pull open the cover to access the top tether anchors.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
tether is in use. Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for
additional information.
Hatchback
For hatchback models, the top tether anchors (B) are
located in the rear cargo area, attached to the back
wall (A) of the vehicle. Squeeze and pull the front part
of the plastic cover to access the top tether anchors.
Remove the cargo shade before installing the top tether.
The cargo shade should remain off while the top
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
CAUTION:
1-46
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts.
Make sure when securing unused safety belts
behind the child restraint that there is no contact
between the child restraint LATCH attachment parts
and the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Flip the cover to access the top tether
anchors.
2.3. For hatchback models, remove the cargo
shade before installing the top tether.
The cargo shade should remain off while the
top tether is in use.
2.4. Raise the headrest or head restraint if the
desired seating position has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint. See Head
Restraints on page 1-6.
1-47
2.5. Route and tighten the top tether according to
your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether under the
headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and
in between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-42 for how to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for
top tether anchor locations.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-40.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
Make sure the release button is positioned so
you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
1-49
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-50
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator (Sedan) on page 3-32
for more information on this, including important
safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64
for additional information.
1-51
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-42 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for top
tether anchor locations.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
the off indicator on the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit when you start the
vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
(Sedan) on page 3-32.
1-52
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-53
If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator in the
passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay
on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the off symbol
is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If
this happens, adjust the head restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-54
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
1-55
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-56
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted airbags.
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-34.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-30
for more information.
1-57
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-58
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags for
the driver and right front passenger, they are in the
side of the seatbacks closest to the door.
1-59
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
1-60
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have seat-mounted side
impact airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-55.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are intended to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side
impact airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that
is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door.
1-61
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-60 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-62
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize the airbags inflated.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn on
the hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-17.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-63
Passenger Sensing System
When the system check is complete, the airbag off
symbol will be visible under certain conditions.
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible when you start your vehicle.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
If you have a sedan, the
airbag off symbol will be
visible near the clock,
located in the center of the
instrument panel, during
the system check.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator (Sedan) on
page 3-32.
If you have a hatchback,
the airbag off symbol will
be visible in the Secondary
Information Center (SIC)
during the system check.
See Secondary Information Center (SIC) (Hatchback
Only) on page 3-43.
1-64
The passenger sensing system works with a sensor that
is part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensor
is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped), the off symbol will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags are
off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator (Sedan) on
page 3-32.
1-65
If a child restraint has been installed and the off symbol
is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-51.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-6.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
1-66
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped)
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag or airbags to be enabled, the off symbol
will not light.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off symbol is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes. This will
allow the system to detect that person and then enable
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-67
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-69 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-68
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-15.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, front sensors, or airbag wiring can affect
the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-64.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-69
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-30 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-84.
1-70
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-30.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-71
✍ NOTES
1-72
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-8
Door Ajar Reminder ........................................2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-8
Lockout Protection ..........................................2-9
Trunk ..........................................................2-10
Liftgate (Hatchback) ......................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-13
Manual Windows ..........................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-15
Immobilizer ..................................................2-18
Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Starting the Engine .......................................2-21
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-22
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-23
Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-27
Parking Brake ..............................................2-28
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission) ...........................................2-29
Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-30
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .....2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-32
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-32
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-33
Mirrors ...........................................................2-34
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-34
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-34
Outside Power Mirror ....................................2-35
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-36
Storage Areas ................................................2-36
Glove Box ...................................................2-36
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-37
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ...................2-37
Sunroof .........................................................2-38
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
One key is used for the ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
2-2
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer/retailer
removes the key tag and gives it to the first owner.
The tag has a code on it that tells your dealer/retailer
how to make extra keys. For vehicle security, keep
the key tag in a safe place and also record the key
number somewhere other than inside of the vehicle.
If you lose your key, you will be able to have a new one
made easily using the tag.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your vehicle may have an electronic immobilizer
designed to protect your car against theft. If so, only
keys with the correct electronic code can be used
to start the vehicle. See Immobilizer Operation on
page 2-18 for additional information. Even if a key has
the same profile, it will not start the engine if the
electronic code is incorrect. If you need a new key,
contact your dealer/retailer who can obtain the correct
key code. Also see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-7.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-3
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter does not
work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
You can lock and unlock your vehicle’s doors from
about 20 ft (6 m) away using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
Hatchback
2-4
Sedan
The following functions may be available if your vehicle
has the RKE system:
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold this
button for approximately one second to open the trunk.
Hatchback
The LED light, on the transmitter, will flash when the
buttons on the transmitter are pressed.
Q (Lock):
Press this button to lock all of the doors.
If all of the doors and the trunk or liftgate are closed,
the hazard lamps will flash once to indicate that locking
has occurred and that the theft-deterrent system is
active.
K (Unlock):
Press this button to unlock all of the doors.
The hazard lamps will flash twice to indicate that
unlocking has occurred and that the theft-deterrent
system is deactivated.
Sedan
n (Lock/Unlock):
Press this button to lock all of the
doors. The hazard lamps will flash once and the horn
will sound to indicate that locking has occurred and that
the theft-deterrent system is active. Press this button
again to unlock all of the doors. The hazard lamps will
flash twice to indicate that unlocking has occurred
and that the theft-deterrent system is deactivated.
The lock and unlock buttons will not operate and the
theft-deterrent system will not activate while the key is in
the ignition.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer/retailer. When the dealer/retailer matches
the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any
remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once
your dealer/retailer has coded the new transmitter,
the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of five transmitters
matched to it.
2-5
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your RKE transmitter
should last about two years.
The battery is weak if the LED fails to illuminate or if the
transmitter will not work at the normal range in any
location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before
the transmitter works, it is probably time to change
the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter, do the
following:
1. Remove the screw from the back of the cover and
open the cover of the transmitter.
2. Pull the transmitter out of the cover and carefully
detach the sticker from the unit. Keep the sticker
clean.
3. Remove the battery and replace it with the new one.
Make sure the positive side of the battery faces up.
Use one three-volt, CR1620, or equivalent, type
battery.
4. Attach the sticker and put the transmitter unit in
the cover.
5. Put the two halves back together and replace the
screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water
will not get in.
6. Test the transmitter operation.
Hatchback
2-6
Sedan
Doors and Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Door Locks
From the outside, use your key or the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-4.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To manually unlock the front doors from the outside,
insert the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.
To manually lock the doors from the outside, insert
the key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
All doors, except for the driver’s door, can be locked by
pushing down the manual door lock and then closing
the door. The driver’s door can only by locked from
the outside by using the key or the optional remote
keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, you can lock and unlock all of the
doors by pushing or pulling the manual door lock located
on each door.
2-7
Central Door Unlocking System
Rear Door Security Locks
The central door unlocking system is activated from the
driver’s door.
Your vehicle has rear door
security locks on each
rear door that prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors from the
inside.
From the outside, you can lock or unlock all the doors
by using either the key or the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped. From the inside, you can lock
or unlock all the doors by using the driver’s door
lock switch while the driver’s door is closed.
Door Ajar Reminder
If one of the doors on the
sedan is not closed
properly while the ignition
is on, the door ajar
light on the instrument
panel comes on and stays
on until the doors are
closed.
If one of the doors on the hatchback is not closed
properly while the ignition is on, the door ajar light on
the secondary information center comes on and stays on
until the doors are closed.
2-8
Using the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Move the lever up to lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
Notice: Pulling the inside door handle while the
rear door security locks are engaged could damage
your vehicle. Do not pull the inside door handle
while the rear door security locks are engaged.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use.
Opening a Rear Door When the
Security Lock is On
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Open the door from the outside.
If you do not cancel the security lock, adults or older
children who ride in the rear will not be able to open the
rear door from the inside. You should let adults and
older children know how to cancel the locks.
Lockout Protection
This feature helps prevent locking the key in the car.
The driver’s door can only be locked with the door
closed. From the outside of the vehicle, close the
driver’s door and lock it using the key or the Remote
Keyless Entry transmitter.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of your vehicle. Always remember to
take your key with you.
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the
door from the outside.
2. Move the lever down to unlock.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks can now be locked and unlocked
normally.
2-9
Trunk
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
To open the trunk on your sedan from outside of your
vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and turn
the key clockwise or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped.
Remote Trunk Release
If your vehicle has a trunk
release button located on
the driver’s door, you
can open the trunk from
inside your vehicle by
pressing the release
button.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
•
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
2-10
Trunk Release Button
When closing the trunk, close from the center to ensure
it fully latches.
If your vehicle has a trunk
release lever located on
the outboard side of
the driver’s seat, you can
open the trunk from
inside your vehicle by
pulling the release lever.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
Trunk Release Lever
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the underside of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle down to open the trunk from the inside.
2-11
Liftgate (Hatchback)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
•
2-12
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-20.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
To open the liftgate on your hatchback from outside of
the vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and
turn it counterclockwise or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped. Then pull up the handle
above the license plate to open the liftgate.
When closing the liftgate, close from the center to
ensure it fully latches.
To lock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock cylinder
and turn it clockwise or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped.
The liftgate can also be locked or unlocked by the
central door unlocking system or remote keyless entry,
if equipped. See Central Door Unlocking System on
page 2-8 and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-4.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each window.
The rear windows do not open fully.
2-13
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
2-14
If your vehicle has power windows, the switches are
located on the driver’s door. In addition, each passenger
door has a switch for its own window.
The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to use the
power windows. To lower the window, press and hold
the switch. To raise the window, lift up on the switch.
Release the switch when the window reaches the
desired level.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Window Lockout
The window lockout is
located with the driver’s
power window switches.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent system.
Press the lockout button to stop the front and rear
passengers from using their window switches. The driver
can still operate all the windows with the lockout on.
Press the lockout button again to return to normal
window operation.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm when you
lock the doors using the key or the manual door lock.
It arms only when you use the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Sun Visors
To block out glare you can swing down the visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has vanity mirrors located on the back of
the sun visors. Swing down the sun visor to expose the
vanity mirror.
2-15
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, and the
trunk or liftgate.
Ensure that the windows are closed, as the system
can be armed even if the windows are open.
2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF and remove the key
from the ignition.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, the transmitter
will not arm the theft-deterrent system.
3. Lock the doors by pressing the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
• The LED light on the transmitter will flash once.
• All of the doors will lock.
• The hazard warning lamps will flash once and
the horn will sound.
• The security light will flash to indicate that the
theft-deterrent system is armed. For hatchback
models, the security light is located on the
secondary information center (SIC) on the center
of the instrument panel. See Secondary
Information Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only) on
page 3-43. For sedan models, the security light is
located on the center of the instrument panel
near the clock. See Instrument Panel Overview
on page 3-4.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident, do one of the
following:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarm
when a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened.
If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system,
lock the vehicle using the key or the manual door locks.
2-16
Disarming the System
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
If the system alarm is active, it can be deactivated using
one of the following methods:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry
−
−
−
transmitter.
The LED light on the transmitter will flash once.
All of the doors will unlock.
The hazard warning lamps will flash twice.
If the door is not opened or if the engine is not started
within 30 seconds after disarming the system using
the transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lock
and the theft-deterrent mode will rearm.
How the System Alarm is Activated
• Press the lock or unlock buttons on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after
30 seconds. The system will then lock the doors and
rearm the theft-deterrent system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If the hazard warning lamps flash once when you press
the lock or unlock buttons on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the theft-deterrent system alarm was
activated while you were away.
If a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened without using
the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
horn will sound and the lamps will flash for up to
30 seconds.
2-17
Immobilizer
Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your vehicle may have a passive theft-deterrent system.
The immobilizer system prevents your vehicle from
being started by unauthorized persons.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-18
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
If your vehicle has an immobilizer system, your vehicle
has a special key that works with the theft-deterrent
system. There is a transponder in the key head that is
electronically coded. The correct key will start the
vehicle. An invalid key immobilizes the engine.
The immobilizer system isolates the power supply to the
ignition system, the fuel pump and the fuel injectors.
If the immobilizer system does not recognize the
electronic code when the key is turned to START,
the engine will not start and the security indicator will
continue blinking. If your key is ever damaged, you may
not be able to start your vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light continues flashing, there
may be a problem with the theft-deterrent system.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be undamaged, try another key. At this time, you may
also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-91. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can have a new key made.
New Vehicle Break-In
Up to five keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
If you lose or damage your keys, only a dealer/retailer
can have new keys made.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-19
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch can be
turned to four different
positions with the key.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the key.
Use the correct key and turn the key only with your
hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If none of
this works, then your vehicle needs service.
LOCK/OFF: This position locks the steering wheel,
ignition, shift lever and transmission. This is the
only position in which you can insert or remove the key.
If the steering wheel is locked, move it form right to
left and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
ACC/ACCESSORY: This position operates some of the
electrical accessories, such as the radio, but not the
climate control system.
{CAUTION:
On manual transmission vehicles, turning the
key to LOCK/OFF will lock the steering column
and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle.
This could cause a collision. If you need to turn
the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn
the key only to ACC/ACCESSORY. Do not push
the key in while the vehicle is moving.
ON/RUN: This is the position the switch returns after
you start the engine and release the key. The switch
stays in ON/RUN when the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running, you can use ON/RUN
to operate the electrical accessories, and to display
some instrument panel warning lights.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The switch returns to
ON/RUN for normal driving. Do not turn the key to
START if the engine is running.
Even if the engine is not running, ACC/ACCESSORY
and ON/RUN allow you to operate electrical accessories,
such as the radio.
2-20
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety
feature.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When the engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
run your engine at high speed when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If electrical parts or
accessories are added, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
2-21
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the battery.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
2-22
Automatic Transmission Operation
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever is located on the console between the seats.
Movement between certain positions requires pushing
the release button on the front of the shifter.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission) on page 2-29.
Ensure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of PARK (P) while holding the brake pedal down,
see Shifting Out of PARK (P) on page 2-30.
2-23
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
When shifting from NEUTRAL (N) to REVERSE (R), you
need to apply the regular brake and push the release
button on the front of the shifter and then forward.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-17.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart while you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
2-24
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4): This position is for
normal driving.
When operating your vehicle in severe cold conditions,
the transmission may be prevented from shifting into
D4 gear until the transmission fluid has warmed up to it’s
operational temperature.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you
could damage the transmission. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds
until then.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transmission will not
shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
If there is a malfunction with the automatic transmission,
the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or the HOLD
indicator light will turn on or flash. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-48 or Hold Mode Light
on page 3-48.
Have your vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
Notice: Do not drive in SECOND (2) at speeds
over 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage the
transmission. Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4) as
much as possible. Do not shift into SECOND (2)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h)
or you can damage your engine.
2-25
Hold Mode
If your vehicle’s transmission has hold mode, you can
select this mode to drive with some characteristics
of a manual transmission. With hold mode turned on,
the automatic transmission will stay in a specific
gear range.
For the Hatchback, the HOLD light will light up on the
secondary information center. For the Sedan, the HOLD
light will light up on the instrument panel cluster.
See Hold Mode Light on page 3-48.
When hold mode is activated, the transmission runs
as follows:
Selector Lever Position
D4
2
1
Gear Range
Third Gear
Second Gear
First Gear
Hold Mode Features
Winter Function
Select hold mode while in AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D4) or SECOND (2) gear to help the
vehicle maintain traction on slippery road surfaces,
such as snow, mud, or ice.
Manually Controlling Shift
Press the HOLD button on the shift lever console to turn
on hold mode. Press the button again to turn off hold
mode, and return to normal automatic transmission
operation.
2-26
Select hold mode to use your automatic transmission
like a three-speed manual transmission.
Manual Transmission Operation
Five-Speed
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
This is your shift pattern.
Here is how to operate your manual transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less than
20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete stop
and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal, lift up the ring on the shift lever and shift
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly
while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
2-27
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down more
than one gear at a time when you downshift.
Parking Brake
The parking brake lever is located between the
bucket seats.
2-28
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28 for more
information.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. If the vehicle has an
automatic transmission, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing the shift
lock release button. If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-29
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission) on page 2-29.
Your automatic transmission vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift-lock control system. You have to
fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-23.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-30
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holding
the brake pedal down, try this:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
3. Remove the cover over the shift-lock release slot by
prying it off using a small, flat object. The shift-lock
release slot is located at the top of the shift lever.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before leaving your vehicle, do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly apply the
parking brake.
2. Fully press in the clutch pedal and place the shift
lever into the gear position as stated below:
• When parking on level ground, place the shift
lever into NEUTRAL.
• When parking downhill, place the shift lever in
REVERSE (R).
• When parking uphill, place the shift lever in
4. Insert the key into the shift-lock release slot and
press and hold the key.
5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
FIRST (1).
3. After shifting, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF,
remove the key and release the clutch.
6. Remove the key from the shift-lock release slot,
insert the key into the ignition and start the engine.
7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.
8. Apply and hold the regular brake fully and release
the parking brake.
9. Shift to the gear you want.
10. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
2-32
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-13.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your
vehicle when the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when it is on fairly level
ground, always set the parking brake and
move the automatic transmission shift lever to
PARK (P), or the manual transmission shift
lever to NEUTRAL.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. If you have an automatic transmission, see
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission) on
page 2-29.
2-33
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use
and pull it for nighttime use.
Outside Manual Mirrors
The outside rearview mirrors should be adjusted so you
can see a little of the side of your vehicle when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Adjust the outside manual mirrors using the control
lever located next to the mirror.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward the
vehicle’s doors.
2-34
Outside Power Mirror
For sedan models, the
control for the power
mirrors is located on the
instrument panel, left of the
steering wheel.
To adjust the mirrors, do the following:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust by moving the
selector switch to L for the driver’s side mirror or
R for the passenger’s side mirror.
2. To adjust the mirror, press the corresponding edges
located on the four-way control pad to move the
mirror in the direction that you want it to go — up,
down, left or right. The ignition must be turned
to ON/RUN to adjust the mirrors.
For hatchback models, the
control for the power mirror
is located on the driver’s
door panel, above the
power window buttons.
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust by pressing the
left side of the selector switch for the driver’s side
mirror or the right side for the passenger’s side
mirror.
2. To adjust each mirror, press the corresponding
edges located on the four-way control pad to
move the mirror in the direction that you want it to
go. The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to
adjust the mirrors.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward the
vehicle’s doors.
2-35
Outside Convex Mirror
Storage Areas
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver’s
seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If your vehicle has this feature, when you operate
the rear window defogger, the heated driver’s and
passenger’s outside power mirrors are warmed to help
clear them of ice, snow, and condensation. See “Rear
Window and Outside Mirror Defogger” under Climate
Control System on page 3-20 for more information.
2-36
Your vehicle has shopping hooks on each front seatback
for your convenience.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Cupholder(s)
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
There are two cupholders located in the center
instrument panel, below the climate control system.
To use the cupholder, push in on its outer edge.
Then pull out the cupholder. After use, push in the
cupholder until it latches.
If your vehicle has this feature, the sunglasses storage
compartment is located above the driver’s door.
To open, pull down and hold the upper part of the cover.
To close the compartment, let go of the cover and the
compartment will automatically close.
There is also a cupholder located in the rear of the
center console.
2-37
Sunroof
If the vehicle has this
feature, the switch is
located on the headliner
between the sun visors.
To fully open the sunroof, open the sunshade.
Then press and hold the passenger’s side of the
switch. To close the sunroof, press and hold the driver’s
side of the switch. The sunroof will stop if the switch
is released during operation.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flow
can be adjusted by pushing and holding the switch until
the sunroof moves to the desired position.
The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle
has an electrical failure.
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition is turned
to ON/RUN. The sunroof can be opened to a vent
position or it can be opened all of the way.
You must manually open and close the sunshade.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, open
the sunshade. Then press and hold the driver’s side of
the switch. To close the sunroof, press and hold the
passenger’s side of the switch until the sunroof reaches
the desired position.
2-38
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-8
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-8
Horn .............................................................3-8
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-9
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-9
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................3-10
Flash-to-Pass ...............................................3-10
Windshield Wipers ........................................3-10
Windshield Washer .......................................3-11
Rear Window Wiper/Washer (Hatchback) .........3-12
Cruise Control ..............................................3-12
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-15
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-16
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17
Dome Lamp .................................................3-17
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .....................3-18
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-18
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-19
Clock ..........................................................3-19
Climate Controls ............................................3-20
Climate Control System .................................3-20
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-23
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-24
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-26
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-27
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-29
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-29
Tachometer .................................................3-29
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-30
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ............................3-30
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-30
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator (Sedan) .......3-32
Charging System Light ..................................3-33
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-34
Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-35
Hold Mode Light ...........................................3-35
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-36
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-36
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-39
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-40
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-40
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-40
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Indicator Light .....3-40
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-41
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-41
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-42
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Secondary Information Center (SIC) .................3-43
Secondary Information Center (SIC)
(Hatchback Only) .......................................3-43
Clock (Hatchback Only) .................................3-44
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-44
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-44
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
(Hatchback) ..............................................3-46
Charging System Light ..................................3-47
Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-48
Hold Mode Light ...........................................3-48
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-48
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-51
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-52
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-52
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-53
AM-FM Radio (Single Display, Base Level) .......3-54
AM-FM Radio (Double Display, Base Level) .....3-55
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) ............................3-59
Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3/WMA) ................3-64
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) .............3-70
Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-Disc Player) ......3-73
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-77
Radio Reception ...........................................3-78
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-78
Care of the CD Player ...................................3-78
Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback) .....................3-79
Backglass Antenna (Sedan) ...........................3-79
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
Hatchback shown
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-23.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-27.
C. Digital Clock and Secondary Information Center. See
Clock on page 3-19 and Secondary Information
Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only) on page 3-43.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-8.
E. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-17.
F. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Horn. See Horn on page 3-8.
Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-53.
Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-37.
Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-19.
K. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Lighter on page 3-19.
L. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-20.
M. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-36.
3-5
Sedan shown
3-6
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-23.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-27.
C. Digital Clock. See Clock on page 3-19.
D. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.
E. Horn. See Horn on page 3-8.
F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-53.
G. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-20.
H. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-19.
I. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-37.
J. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Lighter on page 3-19.
K. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-8.
L. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-36.
3-7
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering wheel
pad to sound the horn.
The hazard warning flasher
button is located to the right
of the climate control
system on the sedan. It is
located in the center of the
instrument panel on the
hatchback.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at the
side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
3-8
Tilt Wheel
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
exit and enter the vehicle.
The tilt wheel lever is
located underneath the
steering column slightly to
the left.
To tilt the steering wheel, hold the wheel and push the
lever down. Then, move the wheel to a comfortable
position and pull the lever up to lock the wheel in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-9.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-10.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-10.
• P Exterior Light Control. See Exterior Lamps
on page 3-15.
• - Fog Lamps, if equipped. See Fog Lamps on
page 3-16.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-91.
3-9
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever away
from you.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on if the
ignition is turned to
ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
3-10
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
Use this lever located on the right side of the steering
wheel to operate the windshield wipers. The ignition must
be turned to ON/RUN to operate the windshield wipers.
HI (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
wiping at high speed.
LO (Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to this position to
choose a delayed wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer
OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
To wash the windshield, pull the windshield
washer/wiper lever toward you with the ignition turned to
ON/RUN.
Misting Function
Move the lever toward INT for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it there until the windshield wipers start; then let go.
The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. If you
want more wipes, hold the band toward INT longer.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them.
If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. If the blades do become damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When the lever is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers will continue to wipe for several cycles and
will either stop or will resume at the speed being used
previously.
3-11
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
(Hatchback)
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Your vehicle may have a rear window washer/wiper.
Operate the rear window washer/wiper system by
pushing the windshield washer/wiper lever away from
you. The wiper operates intermittently when the lever is
in the first position. Washer fluid sprays onto the rear
window and the wiper operates continuously when
the lever is pushed to the second position.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
window, check the fluid level.
3-12
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has cruise control, a speed of about
24 mph (39 km/h) or more can be maintained without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help
on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below 24 mph (39 km/h).
When the brakes are applied, or the clutch pedal if you
have a manual transmission, the cruise control turns off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
3. Press the SET button and release it. The cruise
control light will come on in the instrument panel
cluster to show that the cruise control is on.
{CAUTION:
4. Take your foot off the accelerate pedal.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set to a desired speed
and then the brakes are applied, or the clutch pedal if
you have a manual transmission. This shuts off the
cruise control. But it does not need to be reset. Once the
vehicle is going about 24 mph (39 km/h) or more,
briefly press the RESUME button.
The vehicle returns to the chosen speed and stays there.
The cruise control pad is
located on the inboard
side of the steering wheel.
If the RESUME button is held longer, the vehicle keeps
going faster until the button is released or the brake
pedal is applied. Do not hold in the RESUME button,
unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
1. Press the ON-OFF button to turn cruise control on.
2. Accelerate to the speed desired.
3-13
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed set
earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.
Press the SET button, then release the button and
the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now
cruise at the higher speed.
• Press the RESUME button. Hold it there until the
desired speed is reached, and then release the
button. To increase the vehicle’s speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RESUME button and
then release it. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature only works after the cruise control
is turned on by pressing the SET button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed while
using cruise control:
• Press the SET button until the lower speed desired
is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the SET button. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-14
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. Applying the brake pedal will turn off the cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or press the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transmission.
• Press the ON OFF button on the cruise control pad.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased, when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamp band has three positions:
3 (Headlamps): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the headlamps, together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Taillamps
License Plate Lamp
Instrument Panel Lights
Parking Lamps
The headlamps automatically turn off when the ignition
key is turned to LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turn the band to this position to
turn on the parking lamps, together with the taillamps,
license plate lamp, and instrument panel lights.
OFF: Turn the band to this position to turn all lamps off,
except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
Headlamps on Reminder
If the driver’s door is opened while the ignition is turned
to LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY with the lamps
left on, a warning chime will sound.
3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the parking
lamp position.
• The parking brake is released.
An indicator light on instrument panel cluster will come
on when the DRL system is on.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lights will not
be illuminated unless you have turned the exterior lamps
control to the parking lamp or headlamp position.
The DRL system will turn off when one of the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is off.
• The parking brake is on.
3-16
• The high-beam headlamps are on.
• The low-beam headlamps are on.
• The flash-to-pass feature is used.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better
visibility in foggy or misty conditions. The band located
on the middle of the turn signal/multifunction lever
controls the fog lamps.
While using the fog lamps, the ignition must be turned
to ON/RUN and the low-beam headlamps or parking
lamps must be on.
Turn the band to ON to turn the fog lamps on. An
indicator light comes on in the secondary information
center on the hatchback or in the instrument panel
cluster on the sedan, when the fog lamps are on. See
Fog Lamp Light on page 3-52.
Turn the band to OFF to turn the fog lamps off. The fog
lamps will also turn off when the high-beam headlamps
are turned on. When the high-beam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
Your vehicle will have one of the following dome lamp
switches.
With Sunroof
Hatchback
Sedan
The thumbwheel for this feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column. Turn
the thumbwheel to brighten or dim the lights.
Without Sunroof
The switches have three positions.
ON: The light comes on and stays on.
O (Door): The light comes on when a door is opened.
The light turns off when all the doors are closed.
OFF: The light remains off even when a door is opened.
3-17
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the taillamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lights, and parking lamps. When
the ignition is turned off, the power to these features
will automatically turn off after 5 seconds once the
driver’s door is closed.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With the accessory power outlet, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located next to the
parking brake on the center console.
To use the outlet, remove the protective cap. When not
in use, always cover the outlet with the protective
cap. The accessory power outlet is operational when
the ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
3-18
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Clock
The ashtray is located at the lower part of the center
instrument panel. To remove the front ashtray for
cleaning, open the ashtray fully, press in the retaining
tab and pull the bin out.
If you have a sedan there is a digital clock
located in the center of the instrument panel, above the
center air outlets. When the ignition is turned to
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, the time is displayed in
the digital clock. There are three adjusting buttons for
the digital clock:
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the H button
once. To go forward more than one hour, press and hold
the button until the correct hour is reached.
The cigarette lighter is located to the right of the front
ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN, push the cigarette lighter in all the way
and let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out.
M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the
M button once. To go forward more than one minute,
press and hold the button until the correct minute
is reached.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating.
S (Set): To reset the time to the nearest hour, press the
S button.
For example, if the set button is pressed while the time
is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to 8:00.
If this button is pressed while the time is between 8:30
and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.
After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,
reset the clock.
If you have a hatchback there is a clock located in the
Secondary Information Center (SIC), see Secondary
Information Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only) on
page 3-43.
3-19
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle
can be controlled with this system.
Uplevel shown, Base similar, Sedan only
Temperature Control: Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle. Turn the knob to the blue
area for cool air and to the red area for warm air.
Uplevel shown, Base similar, Hatchback only
3-20
9 (Fan):
Turn the middle knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be on in order for
the air conditioning compressor to run.
To change the current mode, select one of the following
from the right knob:
If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move the lever
to choose the recirculation mode.
Y (Vent):
Using the recirculation mode for extended periods may
cause your windows to fog. If this happens, select
the defrost mode.
This mode directs air to the instrument panel
outlets.
\ (Bi-Level):
This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, and then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
[ (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some of the air will also be directed to the
rear outlets. Be sure to keep the area under the front
seats clear to allow the flow of air to the rear
compartment.
The right knob can also be used to select the defog and
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
? (Recirculation):
This mode keeps outside air
from coming into the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or to
help heat or cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.
If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevel
model), press the button to turn the recirculation mode
on. When the button is pressed, an indicator light in
the button comes on. Press the button again to return to
outside air mode.
: (Outside Air): This mode brings outside air into
the vehicle.
If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevel
model), press the button until the recirculation mode is
turned off. Your vehicle will then return to outside
air mode.
If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move the lever
to choose the outside air mode.
A/C (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has air
conditioning, follow these steps to use the system. Start
the engine and set the fan control knob to the desired
speed. The air conditioning compressor does not
operate when the fan control knob is in the off position.
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning
compressor on and off. When the A/C button is pressed,
an indicator light in the button comes on to show that
air conditioning is activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
3-21
1. Select the vent mode.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
Select one of these available modes from the right knob.
3. Press the A/C button.
É (Defog):
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
4. Select the recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time may
cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry. To
prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip underneath
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
or moisture condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
3-22
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. A small amount of air is
also directed to the outboard outlets for the side
windows and to the instrument panel side outlets. When
this mode is selected, the system runs the
air-conditioning compressor. To defog the windows
faster, turn the temperature control knob clockwise to
the warmest setting.
1 (Defrost):
This mode directs the air to the
windshield and the outboard outlets for the side
windows. A small amount of air is also directed to the
instrument panel side outlets. When this mode is
selected, the system runs the air-conditioning
compressor. To defrost the windows faster, turn the
temperature control knob clockwise to the warmest
setting.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger
Your vehicle may have a rear window and outside
mirror defogger. This feature only works when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Before using
this feature, clear as much snow from the rear
window as possible.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press this button to
turn the rear window and outside mirror defogger on or
off. An indicator light in the button comes to show
that the feature is activated.
If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, the rear
window defogger will remain on until the button is
pressed again or the engine is turned off.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the rear window
defogger will turn off about 10 minutes after the button
is pressed. The defogger can also be turned off by
pressing the button again or by turning the engine off.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
To open an outlet, press on its cover. Turn the cover to
change the direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
3-23
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
Your vehicle may have a passenger compartment
air filter. It is located behind the glove box and can be
accessed after removing the glove box from its housing.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering
the module. The air cleaner/filter may need to be
changed periodically.
1. Open the glove box halfway down.
2. Grip the glove box by both the upper and lower
sides and pull it out of its housing.
3-24
3. Remove the four screws on the knee bolster.
4. Remove the knee bolster.
5. Remove the filter cover by pressing in on the
bottom retaining tab and pulling the cover down.
6. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
7. Then reverse the steps to install the new air
filter and replace the glove box.
View the air flow arrows on the filter before installing
to ensure the filter is installed correctly.
3-25
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
the details show on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just
to let you know they are working. If you are familiar with
this section, you should not be alarmed when this
happens.
3-26
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous. So please get to know your vehicle’s
warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.
Your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following
pages.
Hatchback Cluster
3-27
Sedan Automatic Transmission Cluster shown, Manual Transmission Cluster similar
3-28
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays your engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the number of miles, used
in the United States, or kilometers, used in Canada,
traveled for up to two trips.
You can cycle between the odometer and trip
odometers A and B by pressing the reset button located
in the lower right area of the speedometer. By pressing
the reset button, you can tell how many miles or
kilometers have been recorded on either Trip A or Trip B
since you last set the trip odometer back to zero.
Notice: If you operate the engine above 6,500 rpm,
your vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the tachometer above
6,500 rpm.
To reset each trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button. The reset button resets only the trip
odometer that is being displayed. Each trip odometer
must be reset individually.
3-29
Safety Belt Reminders
Safety Belt Reminder Tone
Safety Belt Reminder Light
If your vehicle has this feature, a tone will sound for
several seconds when the ignition is turned to ON
to remind people to fasten their safety belts. The tone
will not sound if the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled.
The safety belt light will
come on when the engine
is started and stay on
until the driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will not
come on.
Safety Belt Reminder Tone
If your vehicle has this feature, a tone will sound for
several seconds when the engine is started to remind
people to fasten their safety belts. The tone will not
sound if the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
3-30
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on
the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-55.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The
light should go out and the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when the engine is started. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is
a problem.
3-31
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
(Sedan)
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
If you have a sedan, the
airbag off symbol will be
visible near the clock,
located in the center of the
instrument panel during
the system check.
Sedan
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, if the off symbol is lit
on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
If the off symbol in the passenger airbag
status indicator does not come on when you
have a rear-facing child restraint installed in
the right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and side
airbag (if equipped). A child in a rear-facing
child restraint can be seriously injured or killed
if the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags
inflate. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag or airbags. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the airbag or airbags
have been turned off.
If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped)
are enabled (may inflate).
3-32
Charging System Light
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more on this, including
important safety information.
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition is
turned on, and the
engine is not running, as a
check to show you it is
working.
It should go out when the engine is started. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the electrical charging system. Have it
checked by your dealer/retailer. Driving while this light is
on could drain your battery. If you must drive a short
distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your
accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner to
help reduce the drain on the battery.
3-33
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes
on, there is a brake
problem. Have your
brake system inspected
right away.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-34
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light will come
on briefly when the
engine is started.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF or if
the light comes on, stop as soon as possible and
turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
See your dealer/retailer. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34.
Hold Mode Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light comes on
when the hold mode is
active.
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehicle
checked. See “Hold Mode” under Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-23 for more
information.
The ABS warning light will come on briefly when you
turn the ignition to ON/RUN. This is normal. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-35
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Hatchback
Sedan
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant temperature
gage. With the ignition turned to ON/RUN, this gage
shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine
is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has
overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
3-36
The check engine light
comes on to indicate that
there is an OBD II
problem and service is
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or replacement tires that do not match
your vehicle’s original tires can affect your
vehicle’s emission controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to these systems could
lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
When the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, this light comes
on and should go out after a few seconds as a check
to show it is working. If the light does not come on, have
it repaired. This light also comes on during a malfunction
in one of two ways:
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your
dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
3-37
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
3-38
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
If your vehicle has low
engine oil pressure, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately by
your dealer.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working. The light will go out when you turn
the ignition on. If it does not come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse
or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-39
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, the fog lamps light
will come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-16 for more information.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-10
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
If your vehicle has cruise
control, this light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more
information.
3-40
This light turns on
whenever the Daytime
Running Lamps are on.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 3-16 for
more information.
Door Ajar Light
Fuel Gage
The door ajar light will
come on whenever a door
is opened, regardless
of the ignition position.
If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s door is
open, you will also hear a warning chime.
Hatchback
Sedan
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warning light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
should get more soon.
3-41
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light comes on when
the vehicle is low on fuel.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
3-42
The low fuel warning light comes on when there is
approximately 1.7 gallons (6.0 liters) of fuel remaining in
the tank.
To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Filling
the Tank on page 5-7.
Secondary Information Center (SIC)
Secondary Information Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only)
The Secondary Information Center (SIC) displays some
of the warning lights and indicators. The SIC is located in
the center of the instrument panel, above the center air
outlets. The digital clock is also located in the center of
the SIC. See Clock (Hatchback Only) on page 3-44 and
Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 for more
information.
3-43
Clock (Hatchback Only)
Safety Belt Reminders
Your vehicle has a digital clock. The clock is located in
the secondary instrument cluster on the center of
the instrument panel, above the center air outlets. When
the ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
the time is displayed in the digital clock. There are
two adjusting buttons for the digital clock:
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The safety belt light will
come on and stay on until
the driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the H button
once. To go forward more than one hour, press and
hold the button until the correct hour is reached.
M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the M
button once. To go forward more than one minute, press
and hold the button until the correct minute is reached.
This light will come on briefly when you turn on the
ignition as a check to show you it is working.
After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,
reset the clock.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the Secondary
Information Center (SIC), which shows the airbag
symbol. The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system check includes the
airbag sensor, the airbag modules, the wiring and the
crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on
page 1-55.
3-44
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system is
ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on or flashes when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. Have
your vehicle serviced right away by your dealer/retailer.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition to ON/RUN. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
3-45
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
(Hatchback)
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
If you have a hatchback,
the airbag off symbol will
be visible in the Secondary
Information Center (SIC)
during the system check.
Hatchback
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light for several seconds as a system
check. Then, after several more seconds, if the
off symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator,
it means that the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
If the off symbol in the passenger airbag
status indicator does not come on when you
have a rear-facing child restraint installed in
the right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and side
airbag (if equipped). A child in a rear-facing
child restraint can be seriously injured or killed
if the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags
inflate. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag or airbags. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the airbag or airbags
have been turned off.
If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) are enabled (may inflate).
3-46
Charging System Light
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more on this, including
important safety information.
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
and the engine is not
running, as a check
to show you it is working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your dealer/retailer. Driving while
this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-47
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
Hold Mode Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light comes on
when the hold mode is
active.
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light will come
on briefly when the
engine is started.
If it does not come on have your vehicle serviced.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. If
the light comes on, stop as soon as possible and
turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
See your dealer/retailer. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34.
3-48
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehicle
checked. See “Hold Mode” under Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-23 for more
information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate that
there is an OBD II
problem and service is
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or replacement tires that do not match your
vehicle’s original tires can affect your vehicle’s
emission controls and can cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
When the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, this light comes
on and should go out after a few seconds as a check
to show it is working. If the light does not come on, have
it repaired. This light also comes on during a malfunction
in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
3-49
If the Light Is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your
dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
3-50
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Oil Pressure Light
If your vehicle has low
engine oil pressure, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately by
your dealer/retailer.
3-51
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
Fog Lamp Light
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working. The light will go out when you turn
the ignition on. If it does not come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse
or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the fog lamps light
will come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-16 for more information.
Door Ajar Light
The door ajar light will
come on whenever a door
is opened, regardless
of the ignition position.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s door is
open, you will also hear a warning chime.
3-52
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. Here
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
3-53
AM-FM Radio (Single Display, Base
Level)
t u (Scan):
Press this knob until SCAN flashes on
the display, then press either the up or the down
arrow buttons to determine the direction for the radio to
scan the stations. The radio will go to a station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either arrow button again to stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Playing the Radio
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
or off.
1. Turn the radio on.
u (Volume):
3. Tune in the desired station.
Finding a Station
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for longer than two seconds. Ch will
appear on the display when the station has
been set. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed, the station that was set will return.
Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. VOL will appear on the display.
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
p (Tune):
3-54
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
f (Bass/Treble):
Press this button until BAS appears
on the display. Then turn the volume knob to increase
or to decrease the bass. The display will show the bass
level.
AM-FM Radio (Double Display, Base
Level)
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Then turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level. If
a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
f (Balance/Fade):
To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the volume
knob to increase or to decrease the balance between
the right and the left speakers. The display will show the
balance level.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Then turn the volume knob to increase or
to decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume):
Press and release this knob to
turn the system on. Press and hold this knob for more
than two seconds to turn the system off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
3-55
When the system is on, press and release this knob to
mute the system. Press and release this knob again to
turn the sound back on.
The previous volume setting is maintained whenever the
radio is turned on. The volume can be adjusted by using
the volume knob.
SCAN: Push and release this button to scan radio
stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station. Push this
button again to stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM/AUX: Press this button to play an AM station while
a portable audio device is playing. Press this button
again and the system will begin playing audio from the
connected portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “no input device found” will be
displayed.
Up to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six FM-A and
six AM1, six AM2, six AM-A), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
FM: Press this button to switch between FM1 or FM2.
The display will show the selection.
¦¥ SEEK: Press the up or down SEEK arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
¦¥ TUNE: Press the up or down TUNE arrow to go
to the next or to the previous radio station.
3-56
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/AUX to select AM1, AM2, or AM-A. Press
FM to select FM1, FM2 or FM-A.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for longer than two seconds. The
channel number (CH#1 through CH#6) will flash on
the display when the station has been set.
Whenever that numbered preset button is pressed,
the station that was set will return.
5. Repeat the first four steps for each preset button.
AST (Automatic Store): Six FM1 preset stations with
the strongest reception in the region can be automatically
stored. Press the AST button for longer than one second.
The display will show AUTO SCANNING and then
SCANNING will flash on display. Once the stations are
stored, the radio will switch to FM1 and the first preset
station will begin to play. FM-A will appear on the display
when listening to the automatic stored stations. Press the
AM or FM button to cancel automatic store.
Order of Sound Function
The order for displayed sound function is BASS, MID,
TRE, FAD, BAL, EQ OFF, and VOL.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Midrange/Treble): Press this button
until BAS appears on the display. Turn the power/volume
knob to increase or to decrease the bass. The display will
show the bass level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to select the bass level.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display. Turn
the power/volume knob to increase or to decrease the
treble. The display will show the treble level. When
finished making the selection, press this button to select
the treble level. If a station is weak or there is static,
decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the power/volume
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the balance level. When finished making the
selection, press this button to select the balance level.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Turn the power/volume knob to increase
or to decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level. When
finished making the selection, press this button to select
the fade level.
Press this button until MID appears on the display. Turn
the power/volume knob to increase or to decrease the
midrange. The display will show the midrange level.
When finished making the selection, press this button to
select the midrange level.
3-57
Setting the EQ (Equalization)
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop,
voice, and techno. Turn the power/volume knob until the
desired equalization setting appears on the display.
When finished making the selection, press the SOUND
button to select the equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn
the power/volume knob until OFF appears on the
display, then press the SOUND button again to select
the equalization setting.
Order of Sound Function
The order for displayed sound function is EQ OFF,
CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE,
TECHNO, and EQ OFF.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
AUX IN (Auxiliary Input): Your radio system has an
auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the
faceplate. This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. You can
however, connect an external audio device such as an
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or XM™
receiver, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
3-58
The auxiliary input jack will also accept cell phone
connectors. Plug the cell phone connector into the
auxiliary input jack to hear the other side of a cell phone’s
conversation through the vehicle sound system.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in park (P). See Defensive Driving on
page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, turn the portable audio
player on. Press and hold the radio AM/AUX button for
more than two seconds or until audio from the device
begins to play over the car speakers.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. You may need to do additional
volume adjustments from the portable device if
the volume is not loud or soft enough.
AM/AUX: Press this button to listen to the radio while a
portable audio device is playing. The portable audio
device will continue playing, so you may want to stop it
or turn it off.
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
The previous volume setting is maintained whenever the
radio is turned on. The volume can be adjusted by
using the volume knob.
Finding a Station
AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station. The
display shows the selection.
FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station. The
display shows the selection.
( ) TUNE:
Press the TUNE arrows to select radio
stations.
Press the up TUNE arrow to increase or the down
TUNE arrow to decrease the radio frequencies.
Playing the Radio
¦ ¥ SEEK: Press the SEEK arrows to seek radio
stations.
O (Power/Volume):
Press the up SEEK arrow to seek the next radio station
or the down SEEK arrow to seek the previous radio
station.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radio stations.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press this button again to
stop scanning.
Press and release this knob to
turn the system on. Press and hold this knob for
more than two seconds to turn the system off.
When the system is on, press and release this knob to
mute the system. Press and release this knob again
to turn the sound back on.
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
3-59
AST (Automatic Store)
Order of Sound Function
Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest reception in
the region can be automatically stored. Press the
AST button for more than two seconds. The display
shows AUTO SCANNING and then SCANNING flashes
on the display. Once the stations are stored, the
radio switches to FM1 and the first preset station begins
to play. FM-A displays while listening to the automatic
stored stations. Press the AM or FM button to cancel
automatic store.
The order for displayed sound function is BASS, TRE,
BAL, FADE, EQ OFF, and VOL (Bass, Treble, Fade,
Balance, Equalization Off, and Volume).
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 24 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM1, and
six AM2), can be programmed on the six numbered
buttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1, FM2,
AM1 or AM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds. The preset button number
one through six flashes on the display when the
station has been set. When that numbered preset
button is pressed, that preset station returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each preset
button.
3-60
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
(bass) displays. Turn the O knob to increase or
to decrease the bass. The display shows the bass level.
After making the selection, press this button to set
the bass level selection.
Press this button until TRE (treble) displays. Turn the O
knob to increase or to decrease the treble. The display
shows the treble level. After making the selection, press
this button to set the treble level selection. If a station is
weak or has static, decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL (balance) displays. Turn the O knob to
increase or to decrease. The display shows the balance
level. After making the selection, press this button to
set the balance level.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD (fade) displays.
Turn the O knob to increase or to decrease the
fade between the front and the rear speakers. The
display shows the fade level. After making the selection,
press this button to set the fade level.
Setting the Equalization
The order for displayed customized equalization settings
are EQ OFF, CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP,
VOICE, TECHNO, EQ OFF.
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
(equalization) displays to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop,
voice and techno. Turn the O knob until the desired
equalization setting displays. After making the selection,
press the SOUND button to set the equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF displays, turn the O knob until OFF
displays, then press the SOUND button again to set the
equalization setting.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
When a CD is inserted, CDP displays. As the CD is
loading, Filecheck displays. As each new track starts to
play, Track and the track number displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When a CD is in the player
and the ignition is turned on, the radio must be turned
on before the CD starts playback. When the ignition and
radio are turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-61
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There can be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-78 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
3-62
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat the current
track. RPT displays. Press this button again to turn
off repeat play.
3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks
in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM displays.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the first
few seconds of each track on each loaded CD. INTRO
displays. To stop scanning press this button again. The
current track begins to play.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track):
Press the up
TUNE arrow to go to the next track. The track number
displays. Press the down TUNE arrow to go to the start of
the current track. The player continues moving forward or
backward through the CD with each press of the up or
down arrows.
AM: Press this button to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD while listening to
the radio. CDP displays when the CD player has been
selected. The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the CD.
PAUSE flashes on the display. Press this button again to
start playing the CD.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible. See
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) on page 3-70
or Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-Disc Player) on
page 3-73 later in this section.
EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. This is the
only way a CD can be ejected from the player. The CD
can eject when the ignition or the radio is turned off.
• There could have been a problem while burning
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If you have a radio with a single CD (MP3), it is capable
of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R disc,
see “Using an MP3” in the index.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
the CD.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output. Do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for
audio listening.
try again.
3-63
The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phone
connectors. Plug the cell phone connector into the
auxiliary input jack to hear a person speaking on a cell
phone during conversation through the vehicle sound
system.
Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3/WMA)
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
While a device is connected, turn the portable audio
player on and press the radio CD/AUX button to
hear audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button once to play
a CD while a portable audio device is playing. Press
this button a second time for the system to begin playing
audio from the connected portable audio player. Once
in this mode, Auxinput appears on the display. If
the auxiliary jack does not detect the presence of an
output jack, the auxiliary mode does not display.
O (Power/Volume): Turn the O knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Additional adjustments on a
portable device might be needed to get the desired
volume.
3-64
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press and release this knob to
turn the system on. Press and hold this knob for
more than two seconds to turn the system off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
When the system is on, press and release this knob to
mute the system. Press and release this knob again
to turn the sound back on.
The previous volume setting is maintained whenever the
radio is turned on. The volume can be adjusted by
using the volume knob.
AST (Automatic Store)
FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station. The
display shows the selection.
Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest reception in
the region can be automatically stored. Press the
AST button for more than one second. The display
shows AUTO SCANNING and then SCANNING flashes
on the display. Once the stations are stored, the
radio switches to FM1 and the first preset station begins
to play. FM-A displays while listening to the automatic
stored stations. Press the AM or FM button to cancel
automatic store.
( ) TUNE:
Setting Preset Stations
Finding a Station
AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station. The
display shows the selection.
Press the TUNE arrows to select radio
stations.
Press the up TUNE arrow to increase or the down
TUNE arrow to decrease the radio frequencies.
¦ ¥ SEEK:
Press the SEEK arrows to seek radio
stations.
Press the up SEEK arrow to seek the next radio station
or the down SEEK arrow to seek the previous radio
station.
Up to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six FM-A, six AM1,
six AM2, and six AM-A), can be programmed on the
six numbered buttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1, FM2,
FM-A, AM1, AM2, or AM-A.
3. Tune in the desired station.
SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radio stations.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press this button again to
stop scanning.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for more than two seconds. The
channel number (CH#1 through CH#6) flashes on
the display when the station has been set.
When that numbered preset button is pressed, that
preset station returns.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each preset
button.
3-65
Order of Sound Function
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
The order for displayed sound function is BASS, TRE,
FAD, BAL, EQ OFF, and VOL (Bass, Treble, Fade,
Balance, Equalization Off, and Volume).
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL (balance) displays. Turn the O knob to
increase or to decrease the balance. The display shows
the balance level. After making the selection, press
this button to select the balance level.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Midrange/Treble): Press this button
until BAS (bass) displays. Turn the O knob to increase
or to decrease the bass. The display shows the bass
level. After making the selection, press this button
to select the bass level.
Press this button until MID (midrange) displays. Turn
the O knob to increase or to decrease the midrange.
The display shows the midrange level. After making
the selection, press this button to select the midrange
level.
Press this button until TRE (treble) displays. Turn the
O knob to increase or to decrease the treble. The
display shows the treble level. After making the
selection, press this button to select the treble level. If a
station is weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD (fade) displays.
Turn the O knob to increase or to decrease the
fade between the front and the rear speakers. The
display shows the fade level. After making the selection,
press this button to select the fade level.
Setting the EQ (Equalization)
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
(equalization) displays to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop,
voice, and techno. Turn the O knob until the desired
equalization setting displays. After making the
selection, press the SOUND button to select the
equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF displays. Turn the O knob
until OFF displays, then press the SOUND button again
to select the equalization setting.
3-66
Order of Sound Function
As each CD is inserted, CDP displays. As each CD is
loading, Filecheck displays.
The order for displayed sound function is EQ OFF,
CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE,
TECHNO, and EQ OFF.
Once playback begins, the track and track number
displays.
Playing a CD(s)
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
1. Press and release the load button. A message to
select a slot number from 1 through 6 displays.
2. Press the desired slot number. Wait for the
message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for two seconds. A
beep sounds and a message to load multiple discs
displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the LOAD button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player,
it stays in the player. While a CD is in the player and the
ignition is turned on, the radio must be turned on before
the current CD starts playback. When the ignition and
radio are turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There can be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD does not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-78 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-67
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track):
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is
made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the
loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
AM: Press this button to listen to the radio while a CD
is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat the current
track. RPT displays. Press this button again to turn off
repeat play.
3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks
in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM displays.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the first
few seconds of each track on each loaded CD. INTRO
displays. To stop scanning press this button again. The
current track begins to play.
5 DSC − (Previous CDC): Press this button to go back
to the start of the previous CDC.
3-68
6 DSC + (Next CDC): Press this button to go forward
to the start of the next CDC.
Press the up
TUNE arrow to go to the next track. The track number
displays. Press the down TUNE arrow to go to the
start of the current track. The player continues moving
forward or backward through the CD with each press of
the up or down arrows.
FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while a CD
is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD while listening
to the radio. CDP displays when the CD player has
been selected. The CD symbol displays when a CD is
loaded.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. PAUSE flashes on the display. Press this button
again to start playing the CD.
EJECT: Press this button to eject the CD. Press and
hold this button to eject all CDs. This is the only way a
CD can be ejected from the player. The CD can
eject when the ignition or the radio is turned off.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, it is
capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc. For
more information on how to play an MP3/WMA disc,
see “Using an MP3” in the index.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible. See
“Using an MP3” later in this section.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
AUX IN (Auxiliary Input): The radio system has an
auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the
faceplate. This is not an audio output. Do not plug
the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. An
external audio device such as an iPod, laptop
computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or XM™ receiver,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for
use as another source for audio listening.
The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phone
connectors. Plug the cell phone connector into the
auxiliary input jack to hear a person speck on a
cell phone during a conversation through the vehicle
sound system.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
While a device is connected, turn the portable audio
player on and press the radio CD/AUX button to
hear audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.
3-69
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Additional adjustments on a
portable device might be needed to get the desired
volume.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button once to play
a CD while a portable audio device is playing. Press
this button a second time for the system to begin playing
audio from the connected portable audio player. Once
in this mode, Auxinput displays. If the auxiliary jack does
not detect the presence of an output jack, the auxiliary
mode does not display.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD
Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
3-70
• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a.m3u or.wma
extension, other file extensions might not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long file names
and folder names can use more disc memory space
than necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
minimize the length of the file and folder names. An
MP3/WMA CD that was recorded using no file folders
can also be played. The system can support up to eight
folders in depth, though, keep the depth of the folders
to a minimum in order to keep down the complexity and
confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files, the player
lets you access and navigate up to the maximum, but
all items over the maximum are ignored.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory is
displayed as ROOT. All files contained directly under the
root directory are accessed prior to any other directory.
Tracks are played in the following order:
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does
not display.
No Folder
When a CD contains only compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When a CD contains only compressed audio files, but
no folders, all files are located under the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the radio
displays ROOT.
• Playback begins from the first track under the root
directory.
• When all tracks from the root directory have played,
playback continues from files, according to their
numerical listing.
• After playing the last track from the last folder, the
player begins playing again at the first track of the
first folder or root directory.
File System and Naming
The song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If the song
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
displays the file name without the extension (such as
MP3/WMA) instead.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
3-71
Playing an MP3/WMA
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
While the ignition is on, insert a CD partway into the
slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMA displays. The CD
should begin playing. A CD plays only while the ignition
is on or ACC (Accessory).
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
As each new track starts to play, the track number, and
the song name displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When a CD is in the player
and the ignition is turned on, the radio must be turned
on before the CD starts playback. When the ignition and
radio are turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
of Your CDs on page 3-78 for more information.
3-72
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
All of the CD functions work the same while playing an
MP3/WMA, except for those listed here. See “Playing
a CD” earlier for more information.
SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press the SOUND
button for longer than two seconds. The song title or
other available information of a song scrolls on/off. The
offset is scroll on. The scroll mode can be changed
only when the SOUND button is pressed for longer than
two seconds.
DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat the tracks
in the current directory. DIR displays.
Press this button again to repeat the tracks in all of the
directories. ALL displays.
Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-Disc
Player)
¦ ¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (in MP3/WMA
MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
Mode): Press the SEEK arrows to change the folder. If
CD-R does not have any folder, “ROOT” flashes on the
display for a short time.
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
MP3 Format
Press the up
TUNE arrow to go to the next track. The track number
displays. Press the down TUNE arrow to go to the
start of the current track. The player continues moving
forward or backward through the CD with each press of
the TUNE arrows.
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press this button to
display additional text information related to the
current MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional
information such as: Song Title, Album Title, and Artist.
Bit rate might also display.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
When information is not available, No Info (information)
displays.
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track):
Press this button for longer than two seconds to change
display mode.
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a.m3u or.wma
extension, other file extensions might not work.
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
3-73
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long file names
and folder names might use more disc memory space
than necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
minimize the length of the file and folder names. An
MP3/WMA CD that was recorded using no file folders
can also be played. The system can support up to eight
folders in depth, though, keep the depth of the folders
to a minimum in order to keep down the difficulty
and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files, the player
lets you access and navigate up to the maximum, but
all items over the maximum is ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory is
displayed as ROOT. All files contained directly under the
root directory are accessed prior to any other directory.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
3-74
No Folder
When a CD contains only compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When a CD contains only compressed audio files, but
no folders, all files are located under the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the radio
displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks is played in the following order:
• Playback begins from the first track under the root
directory.
• When all tracks from the root directory have played,
playback continues from files, according to their
numerical listing.
• After playing the last track from the last folder, the
player begins playing again at the first track of the
first folder or root directory.
File System and Naming
The song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If the song
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
displays the file name without the extension (such as
MP3/WMA) instead.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Playing an MP3/WMA
While the ignition is on, insert a CD partway into the
slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMA displays. The CD
should begin playing. A CD plays only while the ignition
is on or ACC (Accessory).
As each new track starts to play, the track number, and
the song name displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When a CD is in the player
and the ignition is turned on, the radio must be turned
on before the CD starts playback. When the ignition and
radio are turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There can be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-78 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
3-75
All of the CD functions work the same while playing an
MP3/WMA, except for those listed here. See “Playing
a CD” earlier for more information.
SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press the SOUND
button for longer than two seconds. The song title
and other available information of the song scrolls on/off.
The offset is scroll on. The scroll mode can be
changed only when the SOUND button is pressed for
longer than two seconds.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track):
Press the up
TUNE arrow to go to the next track. The track number
displays. Press the down TUNE arrow to go to the
start of the current track. The player continues moving
forward or backward through the CD with each press of
the up or down arrows.
1 DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat the
tracks in the current directory. DIR displays.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press this button to
display additional text information related to the
current MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional
information such as: Song Title, Album Title, and Artist.
Bit rate might also display.
Press this button again to repeat the tracks in all of the
directories. ALL displays.
When information is not available, No Info (information)
displays.
Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
Press this button for longer than two seconds to change
display mode.
¦ ¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (in MP3/WMA
Mode): Press the SEEK arrows to change the folder. If
CD-R does not have any folder, “ROOT” flashes on
the display for a short time.
3-76
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
SEEK: Press and release this button within 0.5 seconds
to go to the next preset station.
Press and hold this button for longer than 0.5 seconds to
go to the next radio station. The radio seeks stations only
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
When playing a CD, press and release this button within
0.5 seconds to go to the next track. Press and hold this
button for longer than 0.5 seconds to fast forward through
the tracks.
Front View of the
Steering Wheel Controls
Side View of the Volume
Control
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
PWR (Power): Press and release this knob to turn the
system on. Press and hold this knob for more than
two seconds to turn the system off.
MODE: Press and release this button to select FM1,
FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2, AM-A, or CD (MP3). Press and
release this button multiple times to cycle through the
audio playback options that are available on your
vehicle.
+ VOLUME −: Press the toggle bar located below the
+ VOLUME − to adjust the volume. Press the left side of
the toggle bar, below the + (plus) sign to increase the
volume. Press the right side of the toggle bar, below
the − (minus) sign to decrease the volume.
When the system is on, press and release this knob to
mute the system. Press and release this knob again
to turn the sound back on.
3-77
Radio Reception
Care of Your CDs
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean,
soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.
3-78
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players because
the lens of the CD optics can become contaminated by
lubricants.
Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback)
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the roof of the
vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
Backglass Antenna (Sedan)
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs to
be properly attached to the post on the glass.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid
line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make
sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not
damaged. There is enough space between the grid lines
to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
3-79
✍ NOTES
3-80
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3
Braking .........................................................4-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5
Steering ........................................................4-6
Off-Road Recovery .........................................4-8
Passing ........................................................4-8
Loss of Control ..............................................4-8
Driving at Night ............................................4-10
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-10
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-11
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-12
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-12
Winter Driving ..............................................4-13
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow ...................................................4-17
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-17
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-18
Towing ..........................................................4-22
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-22
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-22
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-24
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Drunk Driving
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-14.
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you
drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Control of a Vehicle
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
your vehicle.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
4-3
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has ABS,
this warning light will come
on briefly when you start
your vehicle.
The warning light is on the instrument panel cluster for
a sedan. See Antilock Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-35. For hatchback models, the warning light
is on the Secondary Information Center (SIC). See
Antilock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-48.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-4
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Braking in Emergencies
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. However, if you do not have ABS, your first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — might be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the
very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
ABS, it is different. See Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-4.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
4-5
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
4-6
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have antilock
brakes, adding the hard braking can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road
and make you lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless you have
antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.
See Braking on page 4-3. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-7
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-8
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
If you have the Antilock Brake System (ABS), remember:
It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
ABS, then in a braking skid, where the wheels are no
longer rolling, release enough pressure on the brakes to
get the wheels rolling again. This restores steering
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when you
have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling,
you will have steering control.
4-9
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types of driving
conditions and avoid driving through large puddles
and deep-standing or flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
rearview mirror.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-10
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They might
not work as well in a quick stop and could
cause pulling to one side. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-54.
4-11
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
4-12
Winter Driving
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies
in your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-54.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-13
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Unless your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), you want to brake very gently, too. If you do have
ABS, see Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.
ABS improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a
hard stop on a slippery road. Whether your vehicle
has ABS or not, begin stopping sooner than you would
on dry pavement. Without ABS, if you feel your
vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little.
Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the most
traction you can.
4-14
Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if you brake
so hard that the wheels stop rolling, you will just
slide. Brake so the wheels always keep rolling and you
can still steer.
• Whatever your vehicle’s braking system, allow
greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches can
appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot
reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind
buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch
of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice,
and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-15
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps
the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery
to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-16
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-17.
{CAUTION:
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, or
with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1)
or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If your vehicle does need to be
towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-69.
4-17
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle
can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity
weight or maximum load amount and includes the weight
of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-18
Label Example
A vehicle specific tire and loading information label is
attached to the driver’s side, center pillar (B-pillar).
This label shows the vehicle’s maximum load amount,
the number of occupant seating positions, the original
equipment tires, and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure. For more information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 5-54 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-61.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the “Maximum Load” amount on the tire and
loading information label.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Example 1
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from the “Maximum Load” amount.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“Maximum Load” amount equals 1400 lbs
(635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg)
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
or Maximum Load for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicle is not
designed or intended for such a use. Towing a trailer can
adversely affect handling, durability and fuel economy.
4-19
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
or Maximum Load for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
or Maximum Load for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
load and seating positions. The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s maximum load weight.
4-20
Certification Label
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. See “Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit”
earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the
center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s door latch.
This label tells you the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-21
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
4-22
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle, such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-11.
4-23
Dolly Towing
3. Set the parking brake and remove the key.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear with the
front wheels on the ground could cause transmission
damage. Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the
front wheels on the road.
4. For an automatic transmission, insert the key into
the shift-lock release slot. See Shifting Out of
PARK (P) on page 2-30.
5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
6. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing a Trailer
Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicle
is not designed or intended for such a use. Towing a
trailer can adversely affect handling, durability and
fuel economy.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
4-24
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-14
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-20
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-22
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-22
Engine Coolant .............................................5-23
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26
Engine Overheating .......................................5-26
Cooling System ............................................5-28
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-33
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34
Brakes ........................................................5-35
Battery ........................................................5-38
Jump Starting ...............................................5-39
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-43
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-44
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-44
Headlamps (Hatchback) .................................5-44
Headlamps (Sedan) ......................................5-46
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
(Hatchback) ..............................................5-47
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps (Sedan) .....5-48
Turn Signal Lamps (Side) ..............................5-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
(Sedan) ...................................................5-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-51
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-52
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-53
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-61
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-62
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-64
Buying New Tires .........................................5-64
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-66
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-68
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-68
Tire Chains ..................................................5-69
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-70
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-71
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-72
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-73
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-79
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-79
Appearance Care ............................................5-80
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-80
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-81
Vinyl ...........................................................5-83
Leather .......................................................5-83
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-83
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-84
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-84
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-84
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-84
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-85
5-2
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-85
Finish Care ..................................................5-86
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-86
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-87
Tires ...........................................................5-87
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-88
Finish Damage .............................................5-88
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-88
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-88
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-89
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-90
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-90
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-90
Electrical System ............................................5-90
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-90
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-91
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-91
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-91
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-91
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-92
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-96
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-101
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-102
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-102
Engine Drive Belt Routing ............................5-103
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-69.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-15.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-26.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep
the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 for
additional information.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-36 for sedans or Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-48 for hatchbacks. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type of
fuel used, repairs might not be covered by your
warranty.
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol
must not be used in vehicles that were not designed
for those fuels.
5-6
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are
near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
To open the fuel filler door,
pull up on the release
lever with this symbol on it.
It is located on the floor
on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat.
(Continued)
5-7
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Hatchback shown. Sedan similar
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-85.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-48.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-48.
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is
in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite the fuel vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle inside the
vehicle. It is located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the
secondary hood release lever, located under the
front center of the hood.
5-10
3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop from its
retainer located on the underside of the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
inner fender and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the
hood 12 inches (30 cm) above the vehicle and release
it so it fully latches. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the process if necessary.
4. Securely place the hood prop into the slot on the
inner fender.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:
Automatic shown, Manual similar
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
D. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-35 and Hydraulic Clutch on
page 5-22.
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-20.
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-28.
G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-96.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-33.
I. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
5-13
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
If the engine oil pressure
light comes on, check
the engine oil level
right away.
The oil pressure light is on the instrument panel cluster
for sedans. See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-39.
For hatchbacks, the oil pressure light is on the
Secondary Information Center (SIC). See Oil Pressure
Light on page 3-51. You should check the engine
oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
5-14
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick
all the way back in when you are through.
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark on the dipstick,
add at least one quart/liter of the recommended oil.
This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-101.
5-15
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
5-16
Look for this information on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance and
engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• You frequently use a carrier on top of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi, or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break
down sooner. If any one of these is true for your vehicle,
you need to change the oil and filter every 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) or 3 months, whichever occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months, whichever occurs
first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break
down slower.
5-17
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
5-18
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the engine air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) and replace it every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km). If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the screws and lift off the cover.
2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
3. Put the cover back on tightly and tighten the screws.
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4 for replacement intervals.
5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Check your automatic transmission fluid level at least
twice a year. Add fluid if needed. See At Least Twice a
Year on page 6-19.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 158°F to 176°F
(70°C to 80°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
5-20
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The automatic transmission dipstick is located toward
the front of the engine compartment, near the power
steering fluid reservoir. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag
or paper towel.
2. Push the dipstick back in all the way, wait
three seconds and then pull it back out again.
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transmission fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the area between the
two dimples in the hot range on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, fluid should be
between MIN and MAX mark of the hot area of
the dipstick.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid listed in Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-21
Manual Transmission Fluid
How to Check and Add Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24 for the proper fluid to use.
Hydraulic Clutch
There is one reservoir for both the brake and the
hydraulic clutch fluid. See Brakes on page 5-35
for more information.
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled
with hydraulic fluid.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your master
cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See Part B:
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18 and
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-24.
5-22
To check the fluid level, look on the side of the reservoir.
If the fluid reaches the MAX (A) mark on the reservoir,
the fluid level is correct. If the fluid does not reach
the MIN (B) mark on the reservoir, then fluid needs to
be added. The reservoir is located near the back of the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
Engine Coolant
What to Use
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-23
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Checking Coolant
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24 for more
information.
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rear of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-24
Adding Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
To check the engine coolant, the vehicle must be on a
level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant
level should be between the Maximum (A) and
Minimum (B) marks on the coolant surge tank. The level
rises at engine operation temperature and drops again
when the engine cools down.
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank, but only
when the engine is cool. If the coolant surge tank is
empty, a special fill procedure is necessary. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-26 for instructions on “How to
Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-25
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-36.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-26
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood, but to get service
help right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-27
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. To check
the engine coolant, the vehicle should be parked
on a level surface. Make sure that the air conditioning
is turned off.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
5-28
The coolant level should be between the Minimum and
Maximum marks on the coolant surge tank when the
engine is cool. If it is not, you may have a leak
at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
{CAUTION:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, your vehicle needs service.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not between the Minimum
and Maximum marks, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including
the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you
do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for more
information.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
5-29
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high speed.
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-30
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise about two or
two and one-half turns.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-31
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can feel
the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for
the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the Maximum mark, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the Maximum mark on the coolant surge tank.
Wait about five minutes, then check to see
if the level is below the mark. If the level is below
the Maximum mark, add additional coolant to
bring the level up to the mark. Repeat this
procedure until the level remains constant at the
Maximum mark for at least five minutes.
5-32
Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the
front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir location.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
The level should be between the MIN (B) and MAX (A)
marks on the reservoir. If the level drops below the
MIN (B) mark, add power steering fluid. Do not overfill the
reservoir and remember to replace the cap tightly when
you are finished and clean up any spilled fluid.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-33
Windshield Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-34
Notice:
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your vehicle has one
reservoir for both the brake
and clutch hydraulic
systems. It is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake or clutch hydraulic system. If it
is, you should have the brake/clutch hydraulic system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes
will not work well.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when
new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on
the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-34.
5-35
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-24.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
or clutch hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake or clutch hydraulic
system can damage brake or clutch hydraulic
system parts so badly that they will have
to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or
clutch hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch
might not work well. This could cause a crash.
Always use the proper brake fluid.
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-85.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
can come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
5-36
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When you have the front brake pads
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-23.
Brake Pedal Travel
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-101.
If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, the disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then the brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then — very carefully — make a
few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1 600 km), so the brakes will adjust properly.
If the brake pedal goes down farther than normal,
the rear drum brakes might need adjustment.
Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the
brakes a few times.
5-37
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
brake parts. When you replace parts of the braking
system — for example, when the brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved replacement parts. If you do not, the
brakes might not work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between the front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change in
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-38
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-39
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put an
automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual
transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the
parking brake.
5-39
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
Flip the cap up to access the positive (+) terminal.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-40
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-41
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but
not near engine
parts that move.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
The electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-42
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
Headlamp Aiming
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash,
the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment
to the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if
oncoming drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at
you (for vertical aim).
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cap to its original
position.
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-43
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps (Hatchback)
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-52.
To replace a headlamp bulb:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-10
for more information.
2. Remove the five screws from top of the radiator
grille.
3. Remove the radiator grille.
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
4. Remove the three bolts from the headlamp assembly.
5-44
5. Remove the headlamp assembly.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
rear of the bulb.
8. Release the spring that retains the bulb by loosing
the screw.
9. Remove the old bulb.
7. Remove the headlamp cap.
10. Install the new bulb.
11. Install the bulb retaining spring.
12. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to install the headlamp
assembly.
5-45
Headlamps (Sedan)
To replace a headlamp bulb:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-10
for more information.
6. Release the spring that retains the bulb.
7. Remove the old bulb.
8. Install the new bulb.
9. Install the bulb retaining spring.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to install the headlamp
assembly.
2. Remove the three bolts from the headlamp assembly.
3. Remove the headlamp assembly.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
rear of the bulb.
5. Remove the headlamp cap.
5-46
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps (Hatchback)
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb:
1. Remove the radiator grille and the headlamp
assembly. See Steps 2 through 5 under Headlamps
(Hatchback) on page 5-44 or Headlamps (Sedan)
on page 5-46 for instructions on how to remove the
headlamp assembly.
3. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of the lamp
housing.
4. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwise
to remove it from the bulb socket.
5. Install the new bulb into the socket by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
6. Install the socket into the lamp housing by turning it
clockwise.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to install the assembly.
2. Turn the front turn signal bulb socket
counterclockwise.
5-47
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps (Sedan)
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-10
for more information.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. See Steps 2
through 4 under Headlamps (Hatchback) on
page 5-44 or Headlamps (Sedan) on page 5-46
for instructions on how to remove the headlamp
assembly.
3. Turn the front turn signal bulb socket
counterclockwise.
5-48
4. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of the lamp
housing.
5. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwise
to remove it from the bulb socket.
6. Install the new bulb into the socket by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
7. Install the socket into the lamp housing by turning it
clockwise.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 2 under Headlamps
(Hatchback) on page 5-44 or Headlamps (Sedan)
on page 5-46 to install the assembly.
Turn Signal Lamps (Side)
To replace a side turn signal bulb:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-10
for more information.
2. See Steps 2 through 5 under Headlamps
(Hatchback) on page 5-44 or Headlamps (Sedan)
on page 5-46 to access the side turn signal lamps.
3. Remove the side turn signal lamp assembly
by pulling it forward.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb from the lamp housing by pulling
the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Install the new bulb into the bulb socket by pushing
it in and rotating the bulb socket clockwise.
7. Push the side turn signal lamp assembly back into
its original position.
5-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) (Sedan)
To replace a CHMSL bulb on the hatchback, contact
your dealer/retailer.
To replace a CHMSL bulb on the sedan:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more
information.
2. Remove the two screws and the lamp housing.
Disconnect the wiring harness connector before
removing the lamp housing.
3. Remove the five screws and the reflector assembly.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of the
bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.
5-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace a taillamp, turn signal lamp, stoplamp, or
back-up bulb:
1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk on page 2-10
or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 2-12 for more
information.
Sedan
2. Remove the two screws and the lamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing the
bulb and turning it counterclockwise.
5. Install the appropriate bulb into the socket.
Hatchback
6. Replace the bulb socket into the lamp housing.
Turn the bulb socket clockwise to secure.
7. Reverse Step 2 to reinstall the lamp housing.
5-51
License Plate Lamp
Replacement Bulbs
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp toward you
through the opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
5-52
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-Up
94535571
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
94535587
Headlamps
94535548
Front Parking/Turn Signal
(Hatchback)
94535574
Front Parking/Turn Signal
(Sedan)
94535574
Side Turn Signal (Hatchback)
94535587
Side Turn Signal (Sedan)
94535587
Stoplamp/Taillamps
94535574
Turn Signal Lamps
94535572
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Here is how to remove and replace the windshield
wiper blade:
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade Check” for
more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For the proper type, see
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 5-102.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiper blade
off the arm.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-53
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident.
See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-18.
CAUTION:
5-54
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger car tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
Passenger Car Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance. For more
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading
on page 5-66.
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-18.
5-55
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-79 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-18.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire
or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-79 and If a
Tire Goes Flat on page 5-70.
5-56
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-61.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary use only.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger car tire size.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 70% as high as
it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and the speed rating
of a tire. The load range represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
5-57
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has
built up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-61.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-18.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-18.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
5-58
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-18.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-18.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-18.
5-59
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 5-64.
5-60
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-66.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-18.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-18.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-18. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-79.
5-61
How to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even when
they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-64 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-64
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-68 for
more information.
5-62
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
tire and loading information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-18 for an example of the
tire and loading information label and where it
is located on your vehicle. Make certain that
all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-101.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-71.
5-63
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they
are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect
how fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
Buying New Tires
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
5-64
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires that are the same size,
brand, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires. This way, your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original
tires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-55 for
additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-62.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size,
brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It is all
right to drive with your compact spare
temporarily, as it was developed for use on your
vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-79.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-18, for more information about
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
5-65
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum selection width. For example:
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-64 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-66
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the Unites States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (11⁄2) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature — A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
5-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-68
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-71 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-69
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-70
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-8 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be certain the vehicle will not move, put
blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest
away from the one being changed. That would
be the tire on the other side, at the opposite
end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The following information tells you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-71
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The compact spare tire and tools you will need are
located in the trunk.
3. Remove the foam tray.
4. Remove the jack, the jack handle and the wheel
wrench from the foam tray.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
D. Screwdriver
1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk on page 2-10
or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 2-12 for more
information.
2. Lift the trim cover.
5-72
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-71 for more information.
2. If your vehicle has wheel covers, loosen the
four plastic caps by hand or by using the wheel
wrench. The plastic nuts do not come off of
the cover.
3. Remove the wheel cover using the flat end of the
jack handle. Pry along the edge of the wheel cover
until it comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the cargo area until you
have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
5. Turn the retainer counterclockwise and remove it
from the compact spare.
6. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-79 for more information.
5-73
Hatchback
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-74
Sedan
5. Locate the notch in the frame near each wheel
which the jack head fits in.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and the wheel
wrench onto the end of the jack handle.
6. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-75
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-71.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
10. Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise.
11. Remove the flat tire.
5-76
12. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
13. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
14. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand clockwise until the wheel is held against
the hub.
15. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-77
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new original
equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as
soon as you can and have the nuts tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-101 for wheel nut torque
specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-101 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
5-78
16. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
To store a flat or compact spare tire and tools:
1. Store the flat tire or the compact spare in the
compact spare tire compartment.
2. Secure the retainer.
3. Store the tools securely in the foam tray and place
the tray back in the cargo area.
4. Replace the trim cover.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-79.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h), so you can finish your trip and have your
full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want.
Of course, it is best to replace your spare with a full-size
tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer
and be in good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the
rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep your
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-79
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily
soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners
on surfaces for which they were not intended.
5-80
Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Here are some cleaning tips:
•
•
•
•
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it
will set.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-81
Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip
water.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with
the club soda water instructions given earlier in
this section.
5-82
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Leather
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with
an approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
This may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through
the windshield under certain conditions.
5-83
Interior Plastic Components
Care of Safety Belts
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Glass Surfaces
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Glass should be cleaned often. Your dealer can provide
an approved cleaner, or a liquid household glass
cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust
films on interior glass. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-89.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
5-84
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that
can damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that is should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur and
it would not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a
car washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-89. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-85.
5-85
Finish Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-89.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
5-86
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-87
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-88
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
5-89
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.
5-90
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed
or goes away.
5-91
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the end of
the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle.
Sedan
To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door by
pulling the door out.
Hatchback
5-92
To reinstall the door, first insert the rear edge of the
fuse panel door, then push the front of the door into the
end of the instrument panel to secure it.
Fuses
AUX LTR
HORN,
REAR/FOG
LTR
STOP
RADIO, CLK
Usage
Auxiliary Cigarette Lighter
Horn, Rear Fog Lamps
Cigarette Lighter
Stop Lamp
Audio, Clock
CLSTR,
HAZRD
Instrument Panel Cluster, Hazard
Flasher
TRN/SIG
Turn Signal
DR/LCK
Door Lock, Remote Keyless Entry
CLSTR, CLK
ECM, TCM
Instrument Panel Cluster, Clock
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
BCK/UP
Back-Up Lamp
WPR, WSWA
Wiper, Washer
ECM, TCM
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
ENG FUSE
Engine Fuse
Hatchback
5-93
Fuses
Usage
ALTERNATOR Alternator
HVAC
HVAC Blower
AIRBAG 1
Airbag 1
BLANK
Not Used
ABS
DIODE (ABS)
Antilock Brake System
Antilock Brake System Diode
AIRBAG 2
Airbag 2
BLANK
Not Used
CLK, RADIO
Clock, Audio
Sedan
Fuses
SDM
WIPER
CLUSTER
5-94
Usage
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Windshield Wiper Switch,
Windshield Wiper Motor
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Brake Switch, Anti-theft Mode
Fuses
T/SIG
Usage
Turn Signal, Hazard Switch
EMS2
Stoplamp Switch
EMS1
Engine Room Fuse Block, Rear
HO2S, Transmission Control
Module, VSS, Fuel Pump
STOP LAMP
CIGAR
Brake Switch
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
AUDIO/CLOCK Radio, Clock
OBD
On-Board Diagnostics, Immobilizer
ROOM LAMP
Trunk Lamp, Trunk Open Switch,
Cluster, Dome Lamp
DEFOGGER
Rear Defogger
SUNROOF
Sunroof Module (Option)
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
DOOR LOCK
Fuses
B/UP LAMP
HORN
Usage
Back-up Lamps
Horn
Mirror Control Switch, Dome Lamp,
ELEC MIRROR Air Conditioning Switch
AUDIO/RKE
DEFOG
MIRROR
Radio, Remote Keyless Entry,
Clock, Power Mirror Unit,
Anti-Theft Module
Power Mirror Unit, Air Conditioning
Switch
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
Door Lock/Unlock
5-95
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on
the driver side of the vehicle, near the battery.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Sedan
To access the fuses, pull out the top and bottom flaps
to release the cover. To reinstall the cover, push
the cover until it is secure.
Hatchback
5-96
Fuses
HI BEAM RT
DIS
HI BEAM LT
DIODE (FOG)
Usage
Passenger Side High Beam
Headlamp
Direct Ignition System
Driver Side High Beam Headlamp
Fog Lamp Diode
Side Low Beam
LOW BEAM RT Passenger
Headlamp
ILLUM RT
Parking Lamp Right Side,
Illumination Circuit
LOW BEAM LT Driver Side Low Beam Headlamp
ILLUM LT
INT LTS
INJECTOR
Driver Side Parking Lamp, License
Plate Lamp
Room Lamp
Injector
DEFOG
Defogger
S/ROOF
Sunroof
ILLUM LAMPS
HORN
Illumination Relay
Horn
Hatchback
5-97
Fuses
HEAD LAMPS
FUEL
A/C
FOG LAMPS
Usage
Headlamps
BLANK
Fuel Pump
COOL FAN
LOW
Air Conditioning Compressor
Front Fog Lamp
HVAC BLOWER
Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Blower
ABS
Antilock Brake System
I/P FUSE BATT. Instrument Panel Fuse Box
COOL FAN
IGN 2
BLANK
IGN 1
PWR WNDW
SPARE
5-98
Relays
Radiator Fan
Ignition 2
Blank
Ignition 1
Power Windows
Spare
Usage
Not Used
Cooling Fan Low
HEAD LAMPS HI High Beam Headlamp
HEAD LAMPS
LOW
Low Beam Headlamp
PWR WNDW
Power Window
FRT FOG
Fog Lamp
MAIN POWER
Main Power
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
A/C COMPRSR
Air Conditioning Compressor
COOL FAN HI
Cooling Fan High
ILLUM LAMPS
Illumination Lamps
BLANK
Not Used
Sedan
Fuses
BATT
PK/LP LH
Usage
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Driver Side Parking Lamp, Taillamp
Fuses
PK/LP RH
IGN2/ST
Usage
Passenger Side Parking Lamp,
Taillamp
Ignition Switch
5-99
Fuses
ACC/IGN1
HAZARD
H/L LOW RH
FAN HI
H/L LOW LH
FRT FOG
FAN LOW
H/L HI
A/C COMP
FUEL PUMP
SPARE
ABS
EMS2
P/WINDOW1
ECU
SPARE
EMS1
SPARE
5-100
Usage
Ignition Switch
Hazard Lamps, Theft-Deterrent
System
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Cooling Fan High Speed
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps (Option)
Cooling Fan Low Speed
High-Beam Headlamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
(Option)
Fuel Pump
Spare
Antilock Brake System (Option)
LEGR Valve, HO2S, EVAP Canister
Purge Solenoid, CMP Sensor
Power Window Switch (Option)
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
Spare
Engine Control Module, Injector,
Cooling Fan, Air Conditioning
Compressor
Spare
Relays
H/L LOW
RELAY
Usage
Low-Beam Headlamp Relay
FAN HI RELAY Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
Fuel Pump Relay
P/WINDOW
RELAY
Power Window Relay
PARK LAMP
RELAY
Parking Lamp Relay
FRT FOG
RELAY
H/L HI RELAY
Front Fog Lamps Relay
High-Beam Headlamp Relay
FAN LOW
RELAY
Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
A/C RELAY
Air Conditioning Relay (Option)
MAIN RELAY
Main Relay
Misc.
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
Usage
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-24 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
6.3 qt
6.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.96 qt
3.75 L
Fuel Tank
11.9 gal
45.0 L
Transmission, Automatic
6.2 qt
5.87 L
Transmission, Manual
1.9 qt
1.8 L
Wheel Nut Torque
81 lb ft
110 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
1.6L L4 (L91)
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
6
Automatic and
Manual
0.039-0.043 inch (1.0-1.1 mm)
5-101
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
Passenger Compartment Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Fuel Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blade- Hatchback
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
Rear
Windshield Wiper Blade- Sedan
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
1
NGK
5-102
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
96539649
—
96536694
96458873/96395221
96537170
96130723
—
—
IFR6E111
96497155
96619022
96301840
—
—
—
96648556
96648561
—
—
—
Engine Drive Belt Routing
5-103
✍ NOTES
5-104
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-13
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-18
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-18
At Least Once a Month .................................6-18
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-19
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-20
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-23
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-23
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-23
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-23
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-23
Brake System Inspection ................................6-23
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-24
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-26
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
Your dealer/retailer has trained and supported service
people that will perform the work using genuine parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work. See
Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer/retailer can
perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You
might drive short distances only a few times a week.
Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use your vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to
do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-18.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you will need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here is how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.
Short Trip/City Definition
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Spark Plug Replacement. EVAP
System Service. PCV System Service.
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Every 37,500 Miles (60 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Fluid Change (severe service only).
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi, or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 42,000 Miles (70 000 km): Engine Oil Pan Drain
Plug Washer Replacement.
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement. EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Replacement.
Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
6-5
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads.
Use the Short Trip/City schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down
slower.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs
first). Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Spark Plug Replacement. EVAP
System Service. PCV System Service.
Every 37,500 Miles (60 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Fluid Change (severe service only).
6-6
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement. EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Replacement.
Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Engine Oil Pan Drain Plug Washer
Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to
100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeated
after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals
for the life of this vehicle. The services shown at
150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be repeated at the
same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for
the life of this vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-23.
Footnotes
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-23.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more
information.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
6-7
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP vent
solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
6-8
37,500 Miles (60 000 km)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more
information.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-9
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace timing belt.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace
EVAP vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
6-10
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more
information.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-11
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP vent
solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-12
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to
100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeated
after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals
for the life of this vehicle. The services shown at
150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be repeated at the
same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for
the life of this vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-23.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-23.
6-13
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
6-14
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP vent
solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Replace timing belt.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace
EVAP vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-15
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-16
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and EVAP vent
solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service. (See
footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
6-17
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.
6-18
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect the tires and make sure the tires are inflated to
the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the
spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61.
At Least Twice a Year
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Restraint System Check
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt
assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed
safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint
Systems on page 1-70.
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 5-53 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 5-86 for more information.
Manual Transmission Check
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if
needed.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. A fluid
loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and
repair if needed.
6-19
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Starter Switch Check
Check the fluid level in the brake/clutch reservoir. See
Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-22. A fluid loss in this
system could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired at once.
{CAUTION:
At Least Once a Year
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Body Lubrication Service
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Lubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body door
hinges, rear compartment, and any folding seat
hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment.
6-20
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start
the engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down
halfway and try to start the engine. The starter
should work only when the clutch pedal is pushed
down all the way to the floor. If the starter works
when the clutch pedal is not pushed all the
way down, your vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
• With a manual transmission, the ignition should turn
to LOCK/OFF only when you press the key release
button.
On all vehicles, the ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-28 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-21
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-22
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year, for instance,
each spring and fall. You should let your dealer/retailer do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services can be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-15.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle
boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if
necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing, or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections, or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust
fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 2-32.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings
and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the
radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system
and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
6-23
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engine Oil
Engines starburst symbol. To
determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
Oil on page 5-14.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23.
Usage
Hydraulic Brake
System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Power Steering
System
Usage
6-24
Automatic
Transmission
Manual
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Fluid/Lubricant
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,
in Canada 22689186).
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
in Canada 89021807).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Usage
Manual
Transmission
Shift Linkage
Chassis
Lubrication
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and
Release Pawl
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door (GM Part No. U.S.
12346241,
Hinges
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric
Conditioning
Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-25
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-26
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-27
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-28
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-5
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7
Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-9
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-15
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-17
OnStar® ......................................................7-18
Navigation System ........................................7-18
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ...................................7-18
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact
General Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the BBB Auto Line Program to
enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and
Two, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you
to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program provides for the review of
the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
7-3
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you can call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
7-4
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any
TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with Pontiac
by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668). (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-5
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-6
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
Services Provided
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is covered at
no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will not
be provided through this service.
7-7
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request,
•
7-8
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in
North America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of
departure, you may qualify for trip interruption
expense assistance. This assistance covers
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum of
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and a
copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Calling For Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on
a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early
in the work day as possible to allow for the same
day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-9
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and
distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
7-10
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used
for repair. These parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain
your vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is
not known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are
not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
7-11
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
7-12
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-13
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
7-14
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
7-17
OnStar®
®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar® services, please refer to the OnStar®
Terms and Conditions for information on data collection
and use.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-18
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-69
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-90
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-20
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ................... 3-32, 3-46
Readiness Light .................................. 3-30, 3-44
Airbag System ................................................ 1-55
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-62
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-60
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-58
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-69
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-62
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-64
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-68
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-61
AM-FM Radio ......................................... 3-54, 3-55
Antenna, Backglass ......................................... 3-79
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-79
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ........ 3-35, 3-48
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-87
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-84
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-88
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-85
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-81
Finish Care ................................................. 5-86
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-88
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-84
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-83
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-80
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-84
Leather ...................................................... 5-83
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-88
Tires .......................................................... 5-87
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-88
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-89
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-83
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-85
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-84
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-86
Appointments, Scheduling Service ....................... 7-9
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-19
Audio System ................................................. 3-53
AM-FM Radio ..................................... 3-54, 3-55
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-77
Backglass Antenna ...................................... 3-79
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-78
1
Audio System (cont.)
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
Radio Reception ..........................................
Radio with CD ............................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-78
3-79
3-78
3-59
3-64
5-20
2-23
B
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 3-79
Battery .......................................................... 5-38
Inadvertent Power Saver .............................. 3-18
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5
System Inspection ....................................... 6-23
Brakes .......................................................... 5-35
System Warning Light .................................. 3-34
Braking ........................................................... 4-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-44
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-50
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps .... 5-47, 5-48
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-44
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-43
Headlamps ......................................... 5-44, 5-46
2
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
License Plate Lamps ....................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps .................................
Turn Signal Lamps ......................................
Buying New Tires ...........................................
5-52
5-52
5-51
5-49
5-64
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-101
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-10, 2-32, 4-13, 4-24
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-84
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-78
Your CDs ................................................... 3-78
CD, MP3 ............................................... 3-70, 3-73
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-50
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-69
Charging System Light ............................ 3-33, 3-47
Check
Engine Light ....................................... 3-36, 3-48
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-88
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..........
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ..........................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Glass Surfaces ............................................
Instrument Panel .........................................
Interior .......................................................
Interior Plastic Components ...........................
Leather ......................................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vinyl ..........................................................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Climate Control System ...................................
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
1-38
1-34
1-42
1-32
1-49
1-51
1-40
3-19
5-87
5-85
5-81
5-86
5-84
5-83
5-80
5-84
5-83
5-87
5-88
5-83
5-85
5-84
5-86
3-20
3-24
3-23
Clock .................................................... 3-19, 3-44
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-22
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-79
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-36
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-22
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26
Cooling System .............................................. 5-28
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-12
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-40
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-37
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-9
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-5
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-5
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................... 7-14
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-7
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15
3
D
E
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-16
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-40
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Disc, MP3 ............................................. 3-70, 3-73
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-17
Door
Ajar Light ........................................... 3-41, 3-52
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door Ajar Reminder ....................................... 2-8
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
Driver
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-10
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-11
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-12
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-12
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-10
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-17
Winter ........................................................ 4-13
EDR ............................................................. 7-16
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-90
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-96
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-91
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-91
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-92
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-91
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-91
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18
Check and Service Engine Soon Light .... 3-36, 3-48
Coolant ...................................................... 5-23
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-22
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-36
Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-23
Drive Belt Routing ...................................... 5-103
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-32
Oil ............................................................. 5-14
Overheating ................................................ 5-26
Running While Parked .................................. 2-33
Starting ...................................................... 2-21
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-17
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-31
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-15
4
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-88
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-79
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-8
Flash-to-Pass ................................................. 3-10
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-70
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-71
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-79
Fluid ..................................................... 5-20, 5-22
Power Steering ........................................... 5-33
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-16
Fog Lamp Light ...................................... 3-40, 3-52
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-41
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-42
System Inspection ....................................... 6-23
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .........................
Windshield Wiper .........................................
5-96
5-91
5-92
5-91
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-36
Fuel .......................................................... 3-41
Speedometer .............................................. 3-29
Tachometer ................................................. 3-29
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-36
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-8
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-43
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-91
5
Headlamps ............................................ 5-44, 5-46
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-44
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-16
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-15
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 3-10
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps .... 5-47, 5-48
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-44
High/Low Beam Changer .............................. 3-10
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... 5-49
Heater ........................................................... 3-20
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-40
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-12
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-12
Hold Mode Light ..................................... 3-35, 3-48
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-8
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-19
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-22
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20
Immobilizer .................................................... 2-18
Immobilizer Operation ...................................... 2-18
6
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ....................... 3-18
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-61
Inspection
Brake System ............................................. 6-23
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-23
Exhaust System .......................................... 6-23
Fuel System ............................................... 6-23
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-23
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal .................................. 6-23
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-17
Cluster ....................................................... 3-27
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-39
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Dome ........................................................
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ....................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
License Plate Lamps .......................................
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide ........................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ................................ 3-30,
Antilock Brake System Warning ............. 3-35,
Brake System Warning .................................
Charging System ................................. 3-33,
Cruise Control .............................................
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ..................
Door Ajar ........................................... 3-41,
Fog Lamp .......................................... 3-40,
Highbeam On .............................................
Hold Mode ......................................... 3-35,
Low Fuel Warning .......................................
Malfunction Indicator ............................ 3-36,
Oil Pressure ....................................... 3-39,
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ...........................
Safety Belt Reminders .......................... 3-30,
5-55
3-17
3-18
1-27
1-42
5-52
2-12
3-44
3-48
3-34
3-47
3-40
3-40
3-52
3-52
3-40
3-48
3-42
3-48
3-51
3-32
3-30
3-44
Lights
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-15
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 3-10
High/Low Beam Changer .............................. 3-10
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-18
Lockout Protection ............................................ 2-9
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Lockout Protection ......................................... 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-13
Loss of Control ................................................ 4-8
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-42
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3
M
Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-102
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-18
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-18
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-20
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-19
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-23
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-23
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-23
7
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-23
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-13
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-18
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-23
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-24
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-26
Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-6
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-23
Using .......................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................ 3-36, 3-48
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-22
Operation ................................................... 2-27
Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-13
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-34
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-36
8
Mirrors (cont.)
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-34
Outside Power Mirror ................................... 2-35
MP3 ..................................................... 3-70, 3-73
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-18
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-102
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-29
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-29
Off-Road Recovery ........................................... 4-8
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-14
Pressure Light .................................... 3-39, 3-51
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-18
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-8
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-23
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-18
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-36
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-34
Power Mirror ............................................... 2-35
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-88
Park Brake .................................................... 2-28
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-29
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-30
Parking
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-32
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-31
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-18
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-23
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-24
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-26
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 3-32, 3-46
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-24
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-64
Passing ........................................................... 4-8
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4
Power
Electrical System .........................................
Inadvertent Battery Saver .............................
Steering Fluid .............................................
Windows ....................................................
Privacy ..........................................................
Event Data Recorders ..................................
Navigation System .......................................
OnStar .......................................................
Radio Frequency Identification .......................
5-91
3-18
5-33
2-14
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-18
7-18
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-18
Radios .......................................................... 3-53
AM-FM Radio ..................................... 3-54, 3-55
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-78
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-78
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-59
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-64
Reception ................................................... 3-78
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-8
Rear Seat Operation ................................. 1-7, 1-10
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-12
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-34
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-22
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-3
9
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ..... 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-73
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-72
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-15
General Motors ........................................... 7-15
United States Government ............................ 7-14
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-70
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-71
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-17
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .............................. 5-103
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-33
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ................................... 3-30,
Reminder Tone ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................
Safety Belt Extender ....................................
10
3-44
3-30
5-84
1-19
1-27
1-31
Safety Belts (cont.)
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-31
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-14
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3
Rear Seat Operation .............................. 1-7, 1-10
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Secondary Information Center (SIC) ................... 3-43
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-49
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-51
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-4
California Pershlorate Materials Requirements ..... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ............................... 3-36, 3-48
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15
Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-9
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-68
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-88
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-29
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-30
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-6
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-9
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-79
Installing .................................................... 5-73
Removing ................................................... 5-72
Storing ....................................................... 5-79
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-101
Speedometer .................................................. 3-29
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-21
Steering .......................................................... 4-6
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ....................... 6-23
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-77
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-8
Storage Areas ................................................ 2-36
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-37
Glove Box .................................................. 2-36
Sunglasses Storage Compartment .................. 2-37
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-17
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-38
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-29
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-51
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-15
Immobilizer ................................................. 2-18
Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-8
Time ............................................................. 3-19
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-87
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-64
Chains ....................................................... 5-69
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-71
Cleaning .................................................... 5-87
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-79
Different Size .............................................. 5-66
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-70
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-61
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-62
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-73
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-73
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-72
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-79
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-66
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-68
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-68
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-64
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-22
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-24
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-22
11
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-20
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-22
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-23
Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-27
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-29
Trunk ............................................................ 2-10
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-9
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-9
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-66
Using this Manual ............................................... iii
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-3
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-18
Parking Your ............................................... 2-31
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-90
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-90
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-23
Visors ........................................................... 2-15
12
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-26
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-8
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-8
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-68
Different Size .............................................. 5-66
Replacement ............................................... 5-68
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-13
Manual ...................................................... 2-13
Power ........................................................ 2-14
Windshield
Washer ...................................................... 3-11
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-34
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-53
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-86
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-91
Wipers ....................................................... 3-10
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-12
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-13
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement